1 #LyX 2.1 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
7 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
9 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
10 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
11 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
12 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
13 % the documentation team
14 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
16 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
17 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
19 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
20 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
22 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
24 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
25 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
27 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
28 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
29 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
30 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
32 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
36 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
37 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
39 % for customized page headers/footers
40 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
42 % change header rule width
43 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
45 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
46 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
47 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
49 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
51 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
52 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children false
59 \language_package default
64 \font_typewriter default
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
73 \default_output_format default
75 \bibtex_command bibtex
76 \index_command default
80 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
81 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
85 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
86 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
87 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
92 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
93 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
96 \use_package amsmath 1
97 \use_package amssymb 1
100 \use_package mathdots 1
101 \use_package mathtools 0
102 \use_package mhchem 1
103 \use_package stackrel 0
104 \use_package stmaryrd 0
105 \use_package undertilde 0
107 \cite_engine_type default
111 \paperorientation portrait
115 \notefontcolor #0000ff
132 \paragraph_separation indent
133 \paragraph_indentation default
134 \quotes_language english
137 \paperpagestyle default
138 \tracking_changes false
139 \output_changes false
156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
158 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
159 send them to the LyX Documentation mailing list:
160 \begin_inset CommandInset href
162 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
173 \begin_inset Newline newline
177 \begin_inset Newline newline
181 \begin_inset Note Note
184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
185 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
186 \begin_inset Newline newline
191 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
199 \begin_layout Standard
200 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
201 LatexCommand tableofcontents
208 \begin_layout Chapter
212 \begin_layout Section
216 \begin_layout Standard
217 LyX is a document preparation system.
218 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar \-
219 scripts, publishable books, business
220 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
221 It is unlike most other
222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
229 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
231 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
244 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
247 pt type, left justified, 5
248 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
256 LyX takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
260 \begin_layout Standard
261 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
266 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
270 \begin_layout Standard
275 manual describes several things in addition to LyX's philosophy: most important
276 ly, the format of all of the manuals.
277 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
278 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
284 manual describes that, too.
287 \begin_layout Section
291 \begin_layout Standard
292 Like most applications, LyX has the familiar menu bar across the top of
294 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
295 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
299 \begin_layout Standard
300 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
301 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
302 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
304 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
305 only a vertical scrollbar.
306 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
307 The first case is large images.
308 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
309 image and use the option
315 LaTeX and LyX options
318 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
320 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
321 this doesn't work for equations yet.
324 \begin_layout Standard
325 For a brief description of all LyX menus and toolbar buttons, have a look
331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
333 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
340 \begin_layout Section
344 \begin_layout Standard
345 The help system consists of the LyX manuals.
346 You can read all of the manuals from inside LyX.
347 Just select the manual you want to read from the
354 \begin_layout Section
356 \begin_inset CommandInset label
358 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
365 \begin_layout Standard
366 Almost all features of LyX can be configured via the menu
368 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
372 \begin_inset Index idx
375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
381 LyX is able to inspect your system to see what programs, LaTeX document
382 classes and LaTeX packages are available.
383 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
385 Although this configuration has already been done when LyX was installed
386 on your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
387 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
391 \begin_inset space \space{}
394 new LaTeX classes, and which are not seen by LyX.
395 To force LyX to re-inspect your system, you should use
397 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
401 \begin_inset Index idx
404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
405 Reconfiguration of LyX
410 You should then restart LyX to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
413 \begin_layout Section
415 \begin_inset CommandInset label
417 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
424 \begin_layout Standard
425 You can edit documents in LyX without having LaTeX installed, but you will
426 not be able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it
428 However, some LyX documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
429 PDFs and the like, and every LyX document can always be output as plain
433 \begin_layout Standard
434 Some document classes may depend upon specific LaTeX or DocBook classes
436 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
437 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
440 \begin_layout Standard
441 The LaTeX packages that LyX has found on your system are listed in a file
442 you can view from the menu
444 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
463 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
464 reconfigure LyX (menu
466 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
470 \begin_inset Note Note
473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
474 The two braces in the TeX Code box prevent that the term
475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
482 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
483 More about TeX Code is described in section
488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
490 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
494 , the printout of proper names like LaTeX is explained in section
499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
501 reference "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
511 \begin_inset Index idx
514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
515 Reconfiguration of LyX
520 See section 5.1 of the
524 manual for more information on installing additional LaTeX packages.
527 \begin_layout Chapter
531 \begin_layout Section
532 Basic File Operations
533 \begin_inset Index idx
536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
545 \begin_layout Standard
550 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
551 in addition to some more advanced operations:
554 \begin_layout Itemize
566 \begin_layout Itemize
580 \begin_layout Itemize
592 \begin_layout Itemize
598 \begin_layout Itemize
610 \begin_layout Itemize
620 \begin_layout Itemize
634 \begin_layout Itemize
644 \begin_layout Itemize
650 \begin_layout Itemize
656 \begin_layout Itemize
662 arg "dialog-show print"
668 \begin_layout Itemize
674 \begin_layout Standard
675 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
676 a few minor differences.
679 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
690 command lists the available templates.
691 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
692 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
693 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
695 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
699 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
701 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
708 \begin_layout Standard
709 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
741 Unless you tell LyX to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank
742 space is just that — a big, blank space.
750 \begin_layout Standard
771 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
776 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
778 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar \@.
796 will reload the document from disk.
797 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
798 and want to restore it to the last save.
807 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
808 them as your changes.
811 \begin_layout Section
812 Basic Editing Features
813 \begin_inset Index idx
816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
823 \begin_inset CommandInset label
825 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
832 \begin_layout Standard
833 Like most modern word processors, LyX can perform cut and paste operations
834 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
835 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
836 The next four sections cover the basic LyX editing features and how to
838 We will start with cut and paste.
841 \begin_layout Standard
842 As you might expect, the
846 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
847 various other editing features.
848 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
852 \begin_layout Itemize
866 \begin_layout Itemize
880 \begin_layout Itemize
894 \begin_layout Itemize
904 \begin_layout Itemize
914 \begin_layout Itemize
930 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
936 \begin_layout Standard
937 The first three are self-explanatory.
939 \begin_inset Index idx
942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
948 You can also copy text between LyX and other programs by cut, copy and paste.
957 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
960 \begin_layout Standard
963 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
968 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
974 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
983 will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
985 A new paragraph is started when there is a blank line in the file.
994 , the text is inserted as Paragraphs, where the line breaks of the text
995 will start a new paragraph.
998 \begin_layout Standard
999 \begin_inset Index idx
1002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1009 \begin_inset Index idx
1012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1020 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1022 \begin_inset space ~
1026 \begin_inset space ~
1034 \begin_inset space ~
1038 \begin_inset space ~
1044 Once you have found a word or expression, LyX selects it.
1049 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1052 \begin_inset space ~
1061 \begin_inset space ~
1066 button to skip the current word.
1070 \begin_inset space ~
1075 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1079 \begin_inset space ~
1084 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1086 If the toggle is set, searching for
1087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1098 will not match the word
1099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1113 Match whole words only
1115 option can be used to force LyX to only find complete words, e.
1116 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1120 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1144 LyX offers also an advanced
1147 \begin_inset space ~
1151 \begin_inset space ~
1156 feature that is described in sec.
1157 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1161 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1163 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1170 \begin_layout Standard
1171 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1172 \begin_inset space \space{}
1176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1184 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1186 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1191 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1198 \begin_layout Standard
1199 The content of an inset is selected using the shortcut
1202 arg "inset-select-all"
1208 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1211 selects the whole document.
1214 \begin_layout Section
1216 \begin_inset Index idx
1219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1226 \begin_inset Index idx
1229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1236 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1238 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1245 \begin_layout Standard
1246 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1247 LyX has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1250 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1253 or the toolbar button
1259 to undo some mistake.
1260 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1262 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1265 or the toolbar button
1272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1279 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1280 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1283 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1286 \begin_layout Standard
1287 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1296 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1297 This is a consequence of the 100
1298 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1301 step undo limit mentioned above.
1304 \begin_layout Standard
1313 work on almost everything in LyX.
1314 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1318 \begin_layout Section
1320 \begin_inset Index idx
1323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1332 \begin_layout Standard
1333 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1336 \begin_layout Enumerate
1341 \begin_layout Itemize
1346 once anywhere in the edit window.
1347 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1351 \begin_layout Enumerate
1356 \begin_layout Itemize
1362 LyX marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1365 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1368 to create a copy of the text in LyX's buffer (and the clipboard).
1371 \begin_layout Itemize
1372 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into LyX using
1374 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1381 \begin_layout Enumerate
1382 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1386 \begin_layout Standard
1387 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1388 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1392 \begin_layout Section
1394 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1396 name "sec:Navigating"
1401 \begin_inset Index idx
1404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1413 \begin_layout Standard
1414 LyX offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1417 \begin_layout Itemize
1422 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1423 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1426 \begin_layout Itemize
1427 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1429 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1431 \begin_inset space ~
1436 or by the toolbar button
1439 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1445 \begin_layout Itemize
1446 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1448 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1451 and use the same menu to return to them.
1452 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1455 \begin_layout Standard
1459 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1464 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1465 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1467 \begin_inset space ~
1472 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1473 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1474 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1475 your last editing position.
1478 \begin_layout Standard
1483 key the cursor will be vertically centered in LyX's main window.
1486 \begin_layout Subsection
1488 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1490 name "sub:The-Outliner"
1497 \begin_layout Standard
1498 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1499 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1500 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1502 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1508 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1512 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1513 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1517 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1519 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1524 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1528 \begin_layout Standard
1529 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1530 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1531 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1532 dialog and to modify the citation.
1535 \begin_layout Standard
1536 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1538 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1539 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1547 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1550 \begin_layout Standard
1551 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1552 you further to control the display.
1557 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1558 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1564 option keeps it in the current view state.
1565 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1566 \begin_inset space ~
1569 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1570 \begin_inset space ~
1573 3, the subsections of sections
1574 \begin_inset space ~
1577 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1582 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1583 \begin_inset space ~
1587 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1597 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1600 \begin_layout Standard
1602 \begin_inset space \space{}
1606 \begin_inset Graphics
1607 filename ../images/reload.png
1612 \begin_inset space ~
1615 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1616 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1619 \begin_inset space \space{}
1623 \begin_inset Graphics
1624 filename ../images/down.png
1626 groupId toolbarbuttons
1631 \begin_inset space ~
1635 \begin_inset space \space{}
1639 \begin_inset Graphics
1640 filename ../images/up.png
1642 groupId toolbarbuttons
1647 \begin_inset space ~
1650 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1651 So, for example, you can move section
1652 \begin_inset space ~
1656 \begin_inset space ~
1659 2.4 or after section
1660 \begin_inset space ~
1664 LyX will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1666 \begin_inset Graphics
1667 filename ../images/promote.png
1669 groupId toolbarbuttons
1674 \begin_inset Graphics
1675 filename ../images/demote.png
1677 groupId toolbarbuttons
1681 (or the corresponding key bindings
1689 ) you can change the level of sections.
1690 So you can for example make section
1691 \begin_inset space ~
1695 \begin_inset space ~
1699 \begin_inset space ~
1705 \begin_layout Section
1706 Input/Word Completion
1707 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1709 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1714 \begin_inset Index idx
1717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1724 \begin_inset Index idx
1727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1758 \begin_layout Standard
1759 LyX provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
1761 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
1762 is used to propose completions.
1765 \begin_layout Standard
1766 Input completion can be activated in the LyX preferences (menu
1768 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1773 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1780 \begin_inset space ~
1784 \begin_inset space ~
1789 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
1793 \begin_inset space ~
1798 the completions are always shown in a popup.
1799 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
1803 \begin_inset space ~
1809 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
1810 popup completion and choose if long completions should be abbreviated.
1813 \begin_layout Standard
1814 LyX displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there
1815 are completions available.
1820 key to accept a proposed completion.
1821 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
1822 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
1823 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
1830 \begin_layout Standard
1831 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
1832 ing options for text.
1833 The special math option
1837 enables characters to be composed.
1838 If, for example, you want to insert the character
1839 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
1842 , you can then input the characters
1843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1854 to a formula to get it.
1855 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
1856 of the math toolbar.
1857 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
1861 that is in LyX's installation folder.
1862 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
1871 \begin_layout Section
1873 \begin_inset Index idx
1876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1883 \begin_inset Index idx
1886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1915 \begin_inset Index idx
1918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1949 \begin_layout Standard
1950 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
1963 , which can be changed in the LyX preferences under
1965 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1969 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
1970 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1974 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1976 reference "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
1983 \begin_layout Standard
1987 \begin_inset space ~
1995 \begin_inset space ~
2016 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2020 \begin_layout Labeling
2021 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2025 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2026 LatexCommand nomenclature
2028 description "Tabulator key"
2034 There is no such thing as a tab stop in LyX.
2035 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2036 \begin_inset space ~
2040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2042 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2049 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2053 , especially section
2054 \begin_inset space ~
2058 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2060 reference "sub:Lists"
2066 If you are still confused, look in the
2071 \begin_inset Newline newline
2078 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2079 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2083 \begin_layout Labeling
2084 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2088 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2089 LatexCommand nomenclature
2091 description "Escape key"
2098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2105 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2106 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2109 \begin_layout Labeling
2110 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2116 \begin_inset space ~
2120 \begin_inset space ~
2127 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2128 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2132 \begin_layout Standard
2133 There are three modifier keys:
2136 \begin_layout Labeling
2137 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2155 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2156 LatexCommand nomenclature
2158 description "Control key"
2162 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2163 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2167 \begin_layout Itemize
2176 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2179 \begin_layout Itemize
2188 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2191 \begin_layout Itemize
2200 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2204 \begin_layout Labeling
2205 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2223 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2224 LatexCommand nomenclature
2226 description "Shift key"
2230 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2231 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2234 \begin_layout Labeling
2235 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2253 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2254 LatexCommand nomenclature
2256 description "Alt or Meta key"
2260 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2261 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2262 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2268 \begin_inset Newline newline
2271 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2273 menu accelerator keys
2276 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2277 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2281 \begin_layout Standard
2282 For example, the sequence
2283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2289 \begin_inset space ~
2293 \begin_inset space ~
2299 \begin_inset space ~
2307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2326 \begin_inset space ~
2332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2342 \begin_layout Standard
2347 manual lists all other things bound to the
2355 \begin_layout Standard
2356 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2357 LyX, because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar
2358 at the bottom of LyX's main window which describes the name of the action
2359 you have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2360 The LyX menus also list the defined key bindings.
2361 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2362 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2364 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2380 followed by a capital
2387 \begin_layout Chapter
2389 \begin_inset Index idx
2392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2401 \begin_layout Section
2403 \begin_inset Index idx
2406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2415 \begin_layout Subsection
2419 \begin_layout Standard
2420 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2421 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2422 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2423 numbering schemes, and so on.
2424 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2425 and format the title of your document differently.
2428 \begin_layout Standard
2433 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2434 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2435 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2436 If you don't choose a document class, LyX picks one for you by default.
2437 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2440 \begin_layout Subsection
2442 \begin_inset Index idx
2445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2452 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2454 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2461 \begin_layout Standard
2462 You can select a class using the
2464 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2465 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2469 \begin_inset Index idx
2472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2479 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2483 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2487 \begin_layout Standard
2488 There are four standard document classes in LyX.
2492 \begin_layout Description
2493 Article for basic articles
2496 \begin_layout Description
2497 Report for basic reports
2500 \begin_layout Description
2501 Book for writing a book
2504 \begin_layout Description
2505 Letter for US-style letters
2508 \begin_layout Standard
2509 There are also some non-standard classes, which LyX only uses if you have
2510 installed the corresponding LaTeX class files, though most LaTeX distributions
2511 will include many of these.
2512 Here are some of the classes.
2513 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2515 Special Document Classes
2524 \begin_layout Description
2525 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2528 \begin_layout Description
2529 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2533 \begin_layout Description
2534 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2538 \begin_layout Description
2539 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2540 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2541 There are three article layouts available.
2542 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2543 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2544 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2545 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2550 sequential numbering
2551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2554 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2555 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2556 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2557 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2560 \begin_layout Description
2561 Beamer Layout for presentations
2564 \begin_layout Description
2565 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2566 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2570 \begin_layout Description
2571 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2574 \begin_layout Description
2576 \begin_inset space ~
2579 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2582 \begin_layout Description
2583 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2586 \begin_layout Description
2587 Foils Used to make transparencies
2590 \begin_layout Description
2591 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2592 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2596 \begin_layout Description
2597 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2598 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2601 \begin_layout Description
2602 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2605 \begin_layout Description
2606 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2609 \begin_layout Description
2610 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2611 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2612 (Is used by this document.)
2615 \begin_layout Description
2616 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2619 \begin_layout Description
2620 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2623 \begin_layout Description
2628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2635 X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2636 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2638 This class is not completely compatible with all LyX features.
2641 \begin_layout Description
2642 Slides Used to make transparencies
2645 \begin_layout Description
2647 \begin_inset space ~
2650 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2651 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2654 \begin_layout Description
2655 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2658 \begin_layout Standard
2659 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2661 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2667 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2668 of the document classes.
2671 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2675 \begin_layout Standard
2676 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2678 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2679 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2681 \begin_inset Index idx
2684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2701 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2702 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2704 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2707 \begin_layout Standard
2709 LyX includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
2710 and some of them, like
2714 , are highly specialized.
2715 LyX tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
2716 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing
2718 No LaTeX distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2719 by some document class.
2720 There are just too many of them.
2721 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2724 \begin_layout Standard
2725 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
2726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2733 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
2734 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
2735 document class for a new file.
2736 LyX will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
2738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2741 Installing new LaTeX files
2742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2749 manual for information on how to install them.
2750 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
2756 \begin_layout Standard
2757 Although LyX provides support for many different sorts of documents, it
2758 does not include support for every document class people might want to
2760 For example, many universities provide LaTeX class files to be used for
2761 dissertations submitted to those universities.
2762 The LyX team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
2764 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
2768 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
2774 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
2777 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2779 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2786 \begin_inset Index idx
2789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2798 \begin_layout Standard
2799 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
2800 chosen document class.
2801 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
2802 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
2809 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2813 \begin_inset Index idx
2816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2823 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
2827 \begin_layout Standard
2828 Some modules require LaTeX packages or file format converters that are not
2829 always installed by default.
2830 LyX will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
2831 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
2832 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
2833 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since LyX will not be
2834 able to compile the LaTeX file without the missing prerequisites.
2835 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
2836 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure LyX by selecting
2839 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2843 \begin_inset Index idx
2846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2847 Reconfiguration of LyX
2853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2856 Installing new LaTeX files
2857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2864 manual for more information on installing required packages.
2867 \begin_layout Standard
2868 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
2871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2876 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
2877 LyX will advise you about these things.
2885 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2887 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2889 name "sub:Local-Layout"
2894 \begin_inset Index idx
2897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2898 Document ! Local Layout
2906 \begin_layout Standard
2907 Modules are to LyX much as packages are to LaTeX: They are intended to be
2908 used in a variety of different documents.
2909 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
2910 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
2911 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
2912 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
2913 You want something that is like a document's own LaTeX preamble.
2914 What you want is LyX's
2915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2931 manual for information on how to use it.
2934 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2938 \begin_layout Standard
2939 Each class has a default set of options.
2940 Here's a quick table describing them:
2943 \begin_layout Standard
2944 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
2950 \begin_layout Standard
2952 \begin_inset Tabular
2953 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
2954 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
2955 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
2956 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
2957 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
2958 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
2959 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
2961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3413 \begin_layout Standard
3414 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3420 \begin_layout Standard
3421 You're probably also wondering what
3422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3426 \begin_inset space ~
3430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3434 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3435 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3440 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3445 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3455 headings, there are also
3463 headings, and so on.
3464 We will describe these headings fully in section
3465 \begin_inset space ~
3469 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3471 reference "sub:Headings"
3478 \begin_layout Subsection
3480 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3482 name "sub:Document-Layout"
3487 \begin_inset Index idx
3490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3499 \begin_inset Index idx
3502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3511 \begin_layout Standard
3512 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3514 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3521 \begin_inset space ~
3529 \begin_inset space ~
3534 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3536 This is only necessary if LyX doesn't support special options you want
3537 to use for your document.
3538 To learn more about your favorite LaTeX-class and its options, you have
3542 \begin_layout Standard
3546 \begin_inset space ~
3553 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3559 \begin_inset space ~
3564 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3565 You can choose between the following five options:
3568 \begin_layout Labeling
3569 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3574 Use default page style of current class.
3577 \begin_layout Labeling
3578 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3583 No page numbers or headings.
3586 \begin_layout Labeling
3587 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3595 \begin_layout Labeling
3596 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3601 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3602 Whether LyX uses the current chapter or the current section depends on
3603 the maximum sectioning level of the class.
3606 \begin_layout Labeling
3607 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3612 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3613 have the LaTeX-package
3618 \begin_inset Index idx
3621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3622 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
3628 How they are defined is explained in section
3629 \begin_inset space ~
3633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3635 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3642 \begin_layout Standard
3643 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3644 \begin_inset space ~
3648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3650 reference "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
3657 \begin_layout Subsection
3658 Paper Size and Orientation
3659 \begin_inset Index idx
3662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3663 Document ! Paper size
3669 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3671 name "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3678 \begin_layout Standard
3679 You can find the following options in the menu
3682 \begin_inset space ~
3689 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3695 \begin_inset Index idx
3698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3707 \begin_layout Labeling
3708 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3712 \begin_inset space ~
3717 What size paper to print on.
3722 \begin_layout Itemize
3728 \begin_layout Itemize
3734 \begin_layout Itemize
3740 \begin_layout Itemize
3746 \begin_layout Itemize
3749 US letter, US legal, US executive
3752 \begin_layout Itemize
3758 \begin_layout Itemize
3765 \begin_layout Labeling
3766 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3771 To choose whether to output as
3782 \begin_layout Labeling
3783 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3787 \begin_inset space ~
3792 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
3793 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
3796 \begin_layout Subsection
3798 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3805 \begin_inset Index idx
3808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3815 \begin_inset Index idx
3818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3827 \begin_layout Standard
3828 Paper margins are set in the menu
3830 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3834 \begin_inset Index idx
3837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3846 \begin_layout Standard
3847 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
3848 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
3849 the paper format and the font size into account.
3852 \begin_layout Subsection
3856 \begin_layout Standard
3857 If you change a document class, LyX has to convert
3862 That includes the paragraph environments.
3863 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
3864 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
3865 If this is the case, and you change the document class, LyX will mark the
3866 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
3867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3875 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
3877 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
3878 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
3879 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
3882 \begin_layout Section
3883 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
3884 \begin_inset Index idx
3887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3888 Paragraph ! Indentation
3896 \begin_layout Subsection
3898 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3900 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
3907 \begin_layout Standard
3908 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
3909 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
3912 \begin_layout Standard
3913 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
3914 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
3915 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
3916 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
3920 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
3926 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
3927 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
3928 language than English.
3929 LaTeX takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language
3933 \begin_layout Standard
3934 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
3935 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
3937 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
3938 LyX takes care of that.
3939 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
3941 That way, LyX can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure
3942 figures fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom
3943 of a page, and so on.
3947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3948 LaTeX does this when LyX goes to produce a printable file.
3953 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
3954 LyX gives you the ability globally to change
3958 these pre-coded spacings.
3959 We will explain more later.
3962 \begin_layout Subsection
3963 Paragraph Separation
3964 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3966 name "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
3971 \begin_inset Index idx
3974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3975 Paragraph ! Separation
3983 \begin_layout Standard
3991 \begin_inset space ~
3999 \begin_inset space ~
4006 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4010 \begin_inset Index idx
4013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4019 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4022 \begin_layout Subsection
4026 \begin_layout Standard
4027 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4030 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4032 \begin_inset space ~
4037 dialog and toggle the
4040 \begin_inset space ~
4045 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4048 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4052 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4053 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4057 \begin_layout Standard
4058 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4059 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4062 \begin_layout Subsection
4064 \begin_inset Index idx
4067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4068 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4076 \begin_layout Standard
4079 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4083 \begin_inset Index idx
4086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4095 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4099 \begin_inset space ~
4108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4109 You need to have the LaTeX-package
4114 \begin_inset Index idx
4117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4118 LaTeX-packages ! setspace
4123 installed to use this feature.
4128 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4130 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4132 \begin_inset space ~
4137 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4138 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4141 \begin_layout Section
4142 Paragraph Environments
4143 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4145 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4150 \begin_inset Index idx
4153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4154 Paragraph ! Environments
4160 \begin_inset Index idx
4163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4164 Paragraph environments|(
4172 \begin_layout Subsection
4176 \begin_layout Standard
4177 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4180 \begin_layout Standard
4199 \begin_inset Newline newline
4202 command sequence in LaTeX files.
4203 If you don't know LaTeX, or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4204 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4213 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4216 \begin_layout Standard
4217 A paragraph environment is simply a
4218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4222 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4225 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4226 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4227 scheme, labels, and so on.
4228 Additionally, you can
4229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4236 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4237 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4238 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4239 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4241 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4243 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4246 \begin_layout Standard
4247 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4248 \begin_inset Graphics
4249 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4255 at the left end of the toolbar.
4256 LyX will change the environment of the
4260 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4261 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4262 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4266 \begin_layout Standard
4275 create a new paragraph using the
4279 paragraph environment.
4281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4288 because if you are in one of these environments:
4291 \begin_layout Itemize
4297 \begin_layout Itemize
4303 \begin_layout Itemize
4309 \begin_layout Itemize
4315 \begin_layout Itemize
4321 \begin_layout Itemize
4327 \begin_layout Itemize
4333 \begin_layout Standard
4334 LyX keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4338 , rather than resetting it to
4343 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4344 \begin_inset space ~
4348 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4350 reference "sec:Nesting"
4357 \begin_layout Subsection
4361 \begin_layout Standard
4362 The default paragraph environment is
4367 It creates a plain paragraph.
4368 If LyX resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4369 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4370 this manual) are in the
4377 \begin_layout Standard
4378 You can nest a paragraph using the
4382 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4390 \begin_layout Subsection
4392 \begin_inset Index idx
4395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4404 \begin_layout Standard
4405 A LaTeX title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the
4407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4414 for thanks or contact information.
4415 For certain types of documents, LaTeX places all of this on a separate
4416 page along with today's date.
4417 For other types of documents, the title
4418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4425 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4429 \begin_layout Standard
4430 LyX provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4444 Here's how you use them:
4447 \begin_layout Itemize
4448 Put the title of your document in the
4455 \begin_layout Itemize
4456 Put the author name in the
4463 \begin_layout Itemize
4464 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4465 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4471 Note that using this environment is optional.
4472 If you don't provide any, LaTeX will automatically insert today's date.
4473 If you don't want a date, use the option
4475 Suppress default date on front page
4479 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4480 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4482 \begin_inset space ~
4490 \begin_layout Standard
4491 You can use footnotes to insert
4492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4499 or contact information.
4502 \begin_layout Subsection
4504 \begin_inset Index idx
4507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4514 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4523 \begin_layout Standard
4524 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4525 LyX takes care of the numbering for you.
4528 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4530 \begin_inset Index idx
4533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4534 Section headings ! Numbered
4542 \begin_layout Standard
4543 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4547 \begin_layout Enumerate
4553 \begin_layout Enumerate
4559 \begin_layout Enumerate
4565 \begin_layout Enumerate
4571 \begin_layout Enumerate
4577 \begin_layout Enumerate
4583 \begin_layout Enumerate
4589 \begin_layout Standard
4590 LyX labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4591 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4592 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4595 \begin_layout Standard
4596 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4597 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4598 You group the book into chapters.
4599 LyX does a similar grouping:
4602 \begin_layout Itemize
4607 is divided into either
4618 \begin_layout Itemize
4630 \begin_layout Itemize
4642 \begin_layout Itemize
4654 \begin_layout Itemize
4666 \begin_layout Itemize
4678 \begin_layout Standard
4679 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4687 Not all document types use the
4691 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
4696 is the top-level heading.
4704 \begin_layout Standard
4709 environment to label a new sub-subsection, LyX labels it with its number,
4710 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
4712 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
4714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4724 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4726 \begin_inset Index idx
4729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4730 Section headings ! Unnumbered
4738 \begin_layout Standard
4739 The unnumbered section headings have a
4740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4747 at the end of their name.
4748 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
4749 the table of contents, see section
4750 \begin_inset space ~
4754 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4763 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4764 Changing the Numbering
4765 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4767 name "sub:Numbering-depth"
4774 \begin_layout Standard
4775 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
4776 in the Table of Contents.
4777 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
4779 Just as certain classes start with
4793 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
4803 This is something you can change.
4806 \begin_layout Standard
4809 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4813 \begin_inset Index idx
4816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4825 \begin_inset space ~
4829 \begin_inset space ~
4834 you will see two counters.
4839 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy LyX numbers a section
4841 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
4845 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4846 Short Titles of Headings
4847 \begin_inset Index idx
4850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4851 Section headings ! Short titles
4857 \begin_inset Argument 1
4860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4867 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4869 name "sec:Short-Titles"
4876 \begin_layout Standard
4877 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
4878 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
4879 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
4880 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
4883 \begin_layout Standard
4884 LaTeX allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
4885 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
4886 avoiding the problem mentioned.
4887 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
4890 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4892 \begin_inset space ~
4898 This will insert a box labeled
4899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4903 \begin_inset space ~
4907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4910 which you can use to enter the short title text.
4911 This also works for captions inside floats.
4912 There can only be one short title per title.
4915 \begin_layout Standard
4916 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
4919 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4923 \begin_layout Standard
4924 The following information applies to all section headings:
4927 \begin_layout Itemize
4928 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
4931 \begin_layout Itemize
4932 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
4935 \begin_layout Itemize
4936 You can only use inline math in these environments.
4939 \begin_layout Itemize
4940 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
4943 \begin_layout Subsection
4944 Quotes and Poetry line spacing
4947 \begin_layout Standard
4948 LyX has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
4962 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
4963 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
4964 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
4965 the text they contain.
4966 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
4974 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
4977 \begin_layout Standard
4978 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
4987 when you start a new paragraph.
4988 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
4992 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
4993 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
4994 have to change back to the
4998 environment yourself.
5001 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5011 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5018 \begin_inset Index idx
5021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5030 \begin_layout Standard
5031 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5032 time for the differences.
5041 are identical except for one difference:
5045 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5054 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5057 \begin_layout Standard
5058 Here's an example of the
5071 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5073 See – no indentation!
5077 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5078 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5079 the other paragraph.
5082 \begin_layout Standard
5083 Here's another example, this time in the
5090 \begin_layout Quotation
5096 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5097 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5098 the first line, then
5102 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5106 you were quoting other text.
5109 \begin_layout Quotation
5110 Here's a new paragraph.
5111 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5112 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5115 \begin_layout Standard
5116 As the examples show,
5120 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5121 They should put quotes in the
5126 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5130 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5133 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5139 \begin_inset Index idx
5142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5151 \begin_inset Index idx
5154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5161 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5170 \begin_layout Standard
5175 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5181 \begin_inset Newline newline
5184 Which I did not rehearse!
5188 It could be much worse.
5189 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5191 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5192 indented a bit more than the first.
5193 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5199 \begin_inset Newline newline
5202 And make things look fine
5203 \begin_inset Newline newline
5209 arg "newline-insert newline"
5215 \begin_layout Standard
5220 does not indent both margins.
5221 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5222 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the
5229 arg "newline-insert newline"
5235 \begin_layout Subsection
5237 \begin_inset Index idx
5240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5247 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5256 \begin_layout Standard
5257 LyX has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5267 environments, LyX labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5276 environments, LyX lets you provide your own label.
5277 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5278 describing some general features of all four of them.
5281 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5285 \begin_layout Standard
5286 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5288 First, LyX treats each paragraph as a list item.
5297 reset the environment to
5301 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5302 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5303 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5307 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
5311 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5318 \begin_layout Standard
5319 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5320 In fact, LyX changes the labels on some list items depending on how it
5322 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5323 you read all of section
5324 \begin_inset space ~
5328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5330 reference "sec:Nesting"
5337 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5343 \begin_inset Index idx
5346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5353 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5362 \begin_layout Standard
5363 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5367 paragraph environment.
5368 It has the following properties:
5371 \begin_layout Itemize
5372 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5376 \begin_layout Itemize
5377 LyX uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5380 \begin_layout Itemize
5381 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5385 \begin_layout Itemize
5386 The items can have any length.
5387 LyX automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5388 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5395 \begin_layout Itemize
5400 environment inside another
5404 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5408 \begin_layout Itemize
5409 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5412 \begin_layout Itemize
5413 LyX always shows the same symbol on screen.
5416 \begin_layout Itemize
5418 \begin_inset space ~
5422 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5424 reference "sec:Nesting"
5428 for a full explanation of nesting.
5432 \begin_layout Standard
5433 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5442 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5445 \begin_layout Standard
5446 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5447 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5450 \begin_layout Itemize
5451 The label for the first level
5455 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5459 \begin_layout Itemize
5460 The label for the second level is a dash.
5464 \begin_layout Itemize
5465 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5469 \begin_layout Itemize
5470 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5474 \begin_layout Itemize
5475 Back out to the third level.
5479 \begin_layout Itemize
5480 Back to the second level.
5484 \begin_layout Itemize
5485 Back to the outermost level.
5488 \begin_layout Standard
5489 These are the default labels for an
5494 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5496 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5499 dialog in the submenu
5504 \begin_inset Index idx
5507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5513 These customizations are not displayed in LyX.
5516 \begin_layout Standard
5517 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5518 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5520 \begin_inset space ~
5524 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5526 reference "sec:Nesting"
5533 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5539 \begin_inset Index idx
5542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5549 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5551 name "sec:Enumerate"
5558 \begin_layout Standard
5563 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5564 It has these properties:
5567 \begin_layout Enumerate
5568 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5572 \begin_layout Enumerate
5573 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5577 \begin_layout Enumerate
5578 LyX automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5581 \begin_layout Enumerate
5586 environment resets the counter to one.
5589 \begin_layout Enumerate
5602 \begin_layout Enumerate
5603 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5604 Items can have any length.
5607 \begin_layout Enumerate
5608 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5611 \begin_layout Enumerate
5612 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5615 \begin_layout Enumerate
5616 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5620 \begin_layout Standard
5629 shows the different labels for each item in LyX.
5630 Here is how LyX labels the four different levels in an
5637 \begin_layout Enumerate
5638 The first level of an
5642 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5646 \begin_layout Enumerate
5647 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5651 \begin_layout Enumerate
5652 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5656 \begin_layout Enumerate
5657 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5660 \begin_layout Enumerate
5661 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5666 \begin_layout Enumerate
5667 Back to the third level
5671 \begin_layout Enumerate
5672 Back to the second level.
5676 \begin_layout Enumerate
5677 Back to the outermost level.
5680 \begin_layout Standard
5681 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5685 environment, see section
5686 \begin_inset space ~
5690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5692 reference "sub:Customized-Lists"
5697 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in LyX.
5700 \begin_layout Standard
5701 There is more to nesting
5705 environments than we've stated here.
5706 You should read section
5707 \begin_inset space ~
5711 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5713 reference "sec:Nesting"
5717 to learn more about nesting.
5720 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5726 \begin_inset Index idx
5729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5738 \begin_layout Standard
5739 Unlike the previous two environments, the
5743 list has no fixed label.
5744 Instead, LyX uses the first
5745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5752 of the first line as the label.
5756 \begin_layout Description
5757 Example: This is an example of the
5764 \begin_layout Standard
5765 LyX typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
5769 \begin_layout Standard
5771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5778 it is meant that the first usage of the
5782 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
5784 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
5792 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
5797 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5798 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5800 \begin_inset space ~
5806 \begin_inset space ~
5810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5812 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
5816 for more information.) Here is an example:
5819 \begin_layout Description
5821 \begin_inset space ~
5824 Example: This one shows how to use a
5827 \begin_inset space ~
5839 \begin_layout Description
5840 Usage: You should use the
5844 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
5845 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
5847 It's not a good idea to use a
5851 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
5852 You're better off using
5864 paragraphs into them.
5867 \begin_layout Description
5868 Nesting: You can nest
5872 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
5876 \begin_layout Standard
5877 Notice that after the first line, LyX indents subsequent lines, offsetting
5878 them from the first line.
5881 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5883 \begin_inset Index idx
5886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5895 \begin_layout Standard
5900 environment is a LyX extension to LaTeX.
5903 \begin_layout Standard
5912 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
5914 Here are its properties:
5917 \begin_layout Labeling
5918 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5920 \begin_inset space ~
5923 labels LyX uses the first
5924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5931 of each line as the item label.
5936 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
5937 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
5938 space as described above.
5941 \begin_layout Labeling
5942 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5943 margins As you can see, LyX uses different margins for the item label and
5944 the body of the item text.
5945 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
5946 label width plus a little extra space.
5950 \begin_layout Labeling
5951 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5953 \begin_inset space ~
5956 width LyX uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is
5958 If the label width is larger, the label
5959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5966 into the first line.
5967 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
5968 margin of the rest of the item text.
5971 \begin_layout Labeling
5972 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5974 \begin_inset space ~
5977 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
5982 environment has the same left margin.
5983 \begin_inset Newline newline
5986 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
5989 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5991 \begin_inset space ~
5996 dialog (toolbar button
5999 arg "layout-paragraph"
6006 \begin_inset space ~
6011 determines the default label width.
6012 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6021 multiple times instead.
6022 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in LaTeX.
6024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6031 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6034 \begin_inset space ~
6039 every time you alter a label in a
6044 \begin_inset Newline newline
6047 The predefined default width is the length of
6048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6056 \begin_inset space ~
6062 \begin_layout Standard
6067 list the same way as the
6071 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6077 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6081 \begin_layout Standard
6086 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6087 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6089 \begin_inset space ~
6093 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6095 reference "sec:Nesting"
6099 to learn about nesting.
6102 \begin_layout Standard
6103 There is yet another feature of the
6107 list: As you can see in the examples, LyX left-justifies the item labels
6109 You can use additional
6113 to change how LyX justifies the item label.
6118 are documented in section
6119 \begin_inset space ~
6123 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6125 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
6130 Here are some examples:
6133 \begin_layout Labeling
6134 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6135 Left The default for
6142 \begin_layout Labeling
6143 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6144 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6151 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6154 \begin_layout Labeling
6155 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6156 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6160 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6167 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6170 \begin_layout Subsection
6172 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6174 name "sub:Customized-Lists"
6179 \begin_inset Index idx
6182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6191 \begin_layout Standard
6192 The features described in this section require that the module
6194 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6196 is loaded in the document settings.
6197 The module uses the LaTeX-package
6202 \begin_inset Index idx
6205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6206 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6214 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6215 Custom Enumerate Lists
6216 \begin_inset Index idx
6219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6220 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6228 \begin_layout Standard
6230 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6233 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6236 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6237 There you add the command
6240 \begin_layout Standard
6248 \begin_layout Standard
6249 in TeX Code (shortcut
6259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6260 For more about TeX Code, look at section
6261 \begin_inset space ~
6265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6267 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6280 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6287 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6288 For capital Roman numerals replace
6300 in the command above.
6301 For Arabic numerals use
6309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6316 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6331 \begin_layout Standard
6333 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6341 You can only number 26
6342 \begin_inset space ~
6345 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6353 \begin_layout Standard
6354 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6355 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6358 \begin_layout Standard
6359 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6362 \begin_layout Enumerate
6363 \begin_inset Argument 1
6366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6392 \begin_layout Enumerate
6393 \begin_inset Argument 1
6396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6419 \begin_layout Enumerate
6424 \begin_layout Enumerate
6425 \begin_inset Argument 1
6428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6452 \begin_layout Enumerate
6453 \begin_inset Argument 1
6456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6482 \begin_layout Standard
6483 For this list these commands were used:
6486 \begin_layout Standard
6497 \begin_inset Newline newline
6505 \begin_inset Newline newline
6513 \begin_inset Newline newline
6523 \begin_layout Standard
6530 makes the label emphasized and
6539 \begin_layout Standard
6540 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6548 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6549 lists until you change the definition.
6557 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6559 \begin_inset Index idx
6562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6563 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6571 \begin_layout Standard
6572 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6575 \begin_layout Enumerate
6576 \begin_inset Argument 1
6579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6598 \begin_inset Note Note
6601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6602 goes back to default numbering
6610 \begin_layout Enumerate
6614 \begin_layout Standard
6618 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6622 \begin_layout Standard
6623 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6628 Its numbering appears in blue within LyX to indicate that it is a resumed
6629 list and that the numbering will not be correct in LyX, but in the output.
6632 \begin_layout Standard
6633 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6641 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a LaTeX error.
6649 \begin_layout Standard
6650 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6652 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6653 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6654 of a normal enumeration.
6655 There, insert the command
6658 \begin_layout Standard
6664 \begin_layout Standard
6669 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6673 \begin_layout Enumerate
6677 \begin_layout Enumerate
6681 \begin_layout Standard
6682 Enumeration starting at a given value:
6685 \begin_layout Enumerate
6686 \begin_inset Argument 1
6689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6705 This enumeration starts at 4
6708 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6710 \begin_inset Index idx
6713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6722 \begin_layout Standard
6723 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
6725 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
6728 \begin_layout Itemize
6732 \begin_layout Itemize
6733 with standard spacing
6736 \begin_layout Standard
6737 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
6739 Add there the command
6743 to get no additional list space like in this example:
6746 \begin_layout Itemize
6747 \begin_inset Argument 1
6750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6769 \begin_layout Itemize
6773 \begin_layout Itemize
6777 \begin_layout Standard
6778 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the LaTeX-package
6784 \begin_inset Index idx
6787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6788 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6794 For more information see its documentation,
6795 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
6804 \begin_layout Standard
6805 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
6807 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
6808 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
6809 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
6812 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
6815 \begin_layout Enumerate
6816 \begin_inset Argument 1
6819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6827 parindent, labelsep=2cm
6840 \begin_layout Enumerate
6841 with negative indentation
6844 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6845 Further Customization
6846 \begin_inset Index idx
6849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6850 Lists ! Customization
6858 \begin_layout Standard
6859 You can also change the style of description lists.
6863 \begin_layout Standard
6869 \begin_layout Standard
6870 changes the description label font, the command
6873 \begin_layout Standard
6879 \begin_layout Standard
6880 sets the list style.
6883 \begin_layout Standard
6884 An example where the command
6887 \begin_layout Standard
6892 itshape, style=nextline
6895 \begin_layout Standard
6899 \begin_layout Description
6901 \begin_inset space ~
6905 \begin_inset Argument 1
6908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6914 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
6916 itshape, style=nextline
6926 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
6927 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
6931 \begin_layout Description
6933 \begin_inset space ~
6936 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
6937 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
6938 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
6941 \begin_layout Standard
6942 There are many more commands and features provided by the LaTeX-package
6948 \begin_inset Index idx
6951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6952 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6958 For more information see its documentation
6959 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
6968 \begin_layout Subsection
6970 \begin_inset Index idx
6973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6982 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6990 \begin_inset space ~
6998 \begin_layout Standard
6999 Although LyX has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7007 \begin_inset space ~
7013 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7014 in a specific order, otherwise LaTeX gags on the document.
7015 In contrast, you can use the
7022 \begin_inset space ~
7027 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7028 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7032 \begin_layout Standard
7033 Of course, you're not limited to using
7040 \begin_inset space ~
7049 \begin_inset space ~
7054 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7055 some European academic papers.
7058 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7060 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7062 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7069 \begin_layout Standard
7074 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7075 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7079 \begin_inset space ~
7084 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7085 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7086 Here's an example of each:
7089 \begin_layout Right Address
7091 \begin_inset Newline newline
7095 \begin_inset Newline newline
7099 \begin_inset Newline newline
7102 When is it? What is today?
7105 \begin_layout Standard
7109 \begin_inset space ~
7115 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which LyX sets to
7116 fit the largest block of text on a single line.
7117 Here's an example of the
7124 \begin_layout Address
7126 \begin_inset Newline newline
7129 Where do I send this
7130 \begin_inset Newline newline
7133 Your post office and country
7136 \begin_layout Standard
7137 As you can see, both
7144 \begin_inset space ~
7149 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7154 in either of these environments, LyX resets the nesting depth and sets
7160 This makes sense, since
7168 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7169 Thus, you have to use
7176 arg "newline-insert newline"
7181 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7182 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7184 \begin_inset space ~
7188 \begin_inset space ~
7193 ) to start a new line in an
7200 \begin_inset space ~
7208 \begin_layout Subsection
7212 \begin_layout Standard
7213 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7214 or list of references.
7215 LyX contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7218 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7222 \begin_inset Index idx
7225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7234 \begin_layout Standard
7239 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7240 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7241 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7242 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7256 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7257 The book document classes ignores the
7261 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7265 in a letter document class.
7268 \begin_layout Standard
7273 environment does several things for you.
7274 First, it puts the centered label
7275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7283 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7285 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7286 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7287 the subsequent text.
7288 Well, that's how it will appear on the LyX screen.
7289 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7293 \begin_layout Standard
7294 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7298 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7299 The new paragraph will still be in the
7304 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7305 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7308 \begin_layout Standard
7309 \begin_inset Float figure
7314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7316 \begin_inset Graphics
7317 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7325 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7328 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7330 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7351 \begin_layout Standard
7352 We would love to demonstrate the
7356 environment, but since this document is in the
7357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7364 class, we can't do this.
7365 We inserted it therefore as figure
7366 \begin_inset space ~
7370 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7372 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7377 If you have never heard of an
7378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7385 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7388 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7394 \begin_inset Index idx
7397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7404 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7406 name "sub:Biblio_environment"
7413 \begin_layout Standard
7418 environment is used to list references.
7419 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7420 only use it at the end of the document.
7432 \begin_layout Standard
7433 When you first open a
7437 environment, LyX adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7453 depending on the document class.
7454 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7455 Each paragraph of the
7459 environment is a bibliography entry.
7464 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7465 Each new paragraph is still in the
7472 \begin_layout Standard
7473 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7474 by using a BibTeX database.
7475 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of LyX's bibliogra
7476 phy handling, have a look at section
7477 \begin_inset space ~
7481 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7483 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7490 \begin_layout Subsection
7494 \begin_inset Index idx
7497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7498 Paragraph ! LyX code
7504 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7513 \begin_layout Standard
7518 environment is another LyX extension.
7519 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7524 key as a fixed whitespace;
7528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7540 \begin_inset space ~
7545 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7550 this is the only case in which you can type multiple whitespaces in LyX.
7551 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7554 arg "newline-insert newline"
7571 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7572 So, when you finish using the
7576 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7577 Also, you can nest the
7581 environment inside of others.
7584 \begin_layout Standard
7585 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7588 \begin_layout Itemize
7592 arg "newline-insert newline"
7595 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7596 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7600 \begin_inset space \space{}
7610 arg "newline-insert newline"
7616 \begin_layout Itemize
7620 arg "newline-insert newline"
7631 \begin_layout Itemize
7636 to begin a new paragraph, then you can use a
7643 \begin_layout Itemize
7647 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
7654 \begin_layout Itemize
7655 You can't have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7656 You must put at least one
7660 in any line you want blank.
7661 Otherwise, LaTeX generates errors.
7664 \begin_layout Itemize
7665 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
7669 since that will insert
7674 You get the typewriter double quotes with
7677 arg "self-insert \""
7683 \begin_layout Standard
7687 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7691 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7695 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7699 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7703 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7704 printf("Hello World!
7709 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7713 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7717 \begin_layout Standard
7718 This is just the standard
7719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7730 \begin_layout Standard
7735 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts,
7736 rc-files, and so on.
7737 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
7738 as if you used a typewriter.
7739 \begin_inset Index idx
7742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7743 Paragraph environments|)
7748 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
7751 Program Code Listings
7756 \begin_inset space ~
7764 \begin_layout Section
7765 Nesting Environments
7766 \begin_inset Index idx
7769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7770 Nesting ! Environments
7776 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7785 \begin_layout Subsection
7789 \begin_layout Standard
7790 LyX treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific
7792 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
7794 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
7796 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
7798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7808 \begin_layout Enumerate
7812 \begin_layout Enumerate
7817 \begin_layout Enumerate
7821 \begin_layout Enumerate
7826 \begin_layout Enumerate
7830 \begin_layout Standard
7831 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
7832 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
7834 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7836 \begin_inset space ~
7840 \begin_inset space ~
7848 \begin_inset space ~
7852 \begin_inset space ~
7857 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
7859 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
7862 arg "depth-increment"
7868 arg "depth-decrement"
7882 arg "depth-increment"
7888 arg "depth-decrement"
7892 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
7893 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
7897 \begin_layout Standard
7898 Note that LyX only changes the nesting depth if it can.
7899 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
7900 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
7901 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
7904 \begin_layout Standard
7905 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
7906 In LyX, you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're
7908 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
7911 \begin_layout Subsection
7912 What You Can and Can't Nest
7915 \begin_layout Standard
7916 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
7917 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
7920 \begin_layout Standard
7921 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
7922 than a simple yes or no.
7923 There are three types of paragraph environments:
7926 \begin_layout Itemize
7927 Completely unnestable
7930 \begin_layout Itemize
7931 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
7935 \begin_layout Itemize
7936 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
7940 \begin_layout Standard
7941 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
7942 environments have them:
7945 \begin_layout Description
7946 Unnestable Can't nest them.
7947 Can't nest into them.
7951 \begin_layout Itemize
7957 \begin_layout Itemize
7963 \begin_layout Itemize
7969 \begin_layout Itemize
7975 \begin_layout Itemize
7982 \begin_layout Description
7984 \begin_inset space ~
7987 Nestable You can nest them.
7988 You can nest other things into them.
7992 \begin_layout Itemize
7998 \begin_layout Itemize
8004 \begin_layout Itemize
8010 \begin_layout Itemize
8016 \begin_layout Itemize
8022 \begin_layout Itemize
8028 \begin_layout Itemize
8034 \begin_layout Itemize
8041 \begin_layout Description
8042 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8043 You can't nest anything into them.
8047 \begin_layout Itemize
8053 \begin_layout Itemize
8059 \begin_layout Itemize
8065 \begin_layout Itemize
8071 \begin_layout Itemize
8077 \begin_layout Itemize
8083 \begin_layout Itemize
8089 \begin_layout Itemize
8095 \begin_layout Itemize
8101 \begin_layout Itemize
8107 \begin_layout Itemize
8113 \begin_layout Itemize
8119 \begin_layout Itemize
8125 \begin_layout Itemize
8129 \begin_inset space ~
8135 \begin_layout Itemize
8142 \begin_layout Standard
8143 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8151 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8161 \begin_inset space ~
8164 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8165 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8166 nested section headings violate this.
8174 \begin_layout Subsection
8175 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8176 \begin_inset Index idx
8179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8180 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8188 \begin_layout Standard
8189 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8190 affected by nesting anyhow.
8194 \begin_layout Itemize
8198 \begin_layout Itemize
8202 \begin_layout Itemize
8206 \begin_layout Standard
8208 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8216 Figures and tables in
8220 are not affected by this.
8225 Have a look at section
8226 \begin_inset space ~
8230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8232 reference "sec:Floats"
8236 for more information about
8243 \begin_layout Standard
8244 LyX can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8245 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8249 \begin_layout Standard
8250 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8255 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8258 of its own, it behaves just like a
8259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8266 paragraph environment.
8267 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8271 \begin_layout Standard
8272 Here's an example with a table:
8275 \begin_layout Enumerate
8280 \begin_layout Enumerate
8281 This is (a) and it's nested.
8285 \begin_layout Standard
8286 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8292 \begin_layout Standard
8294 \begin_inset Tabular
8295 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8296 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8297 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8298 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8382 \begin_layout Standard
8383 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8390 \begin_layout Enumerate
8392 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8396 \begin_layout Enumerate
8400 \begin_layout Standard
8401 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8404 \begin_layout Enumerate
8409 \begin_layout Enumerate
8410 This is (a) and it's nested.
8414 \begin_layout Standard
8415 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8421 \begin_layout Standard
8423 \begin_inset Tabular
8424 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8425 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8426 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8427 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8511 \begin_layout Standard
8512 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8518 \begin_layout Enumerate
8525 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8528 \begin_layout Enumerate
8532 \begin_layout Standard
8533 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
8537 \begin_layout Standard
8538 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
8540 LyX then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
8543 \begin_layout Enumerate
8548 \begin_layout Enumerate
8549 This is (a) and it's nested.
8552 \begin_layout Standard
8553 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8559 \begin_layout Standard
8561 \begin_inset Tabular
8562 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8563 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8564 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8565 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8650 \begin_layout Standard
8651 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8657 \begin_layout Enumerate
8659 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
8666 \begin_layout Enumerate
8670 \begin_layout Standard
8671 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
8677 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
8678 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
8682 \begin_layout Subsection
8683 Usage and General Features
8686 \begin_layout Standard
8687 Speaking of levels, LyX can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
8689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8696 is the innermost possible depth.
8697 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
8700 \begin_layout Enumerate
8701 level #1 – outermost
8705 \begin_layout Enumerate
8710 \begin_layout Enumerate
8715 \begin_layout Enumerate
8720 \begin_layout Itemize
8725 \begin_layout Itemize
8734 \begin_layout Standard
8735 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
8736 both of them in the example.
8737 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
8747 For example, if we tried to nest another
8752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8759 , we would get errors.
8762 \begin_layout Subsection
8764 \begin_inset Index idx
8767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8776 \begin_layout Standard
8777 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
8778 We have several examples of nested environments.
8779 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
8783 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8784 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
8787 \begin_layout Labeling
8788 \labelwidthstring MMM
8789 #1-a This is the outermost level.
8798 \begin_layout Labeling
8799 \labelwidthstring MMM
8800 #2-a This is level #2.
8801 We created it by using
8804 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8810 arg "depth-increment"
8817 \begin_layout Labeling
8818 \labelwidthstring MMM
8819 #3-a This is level #3.
8820 This time, we just enter
8827 arg "depth-increment"
8831 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
8835 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8841 arg "depth-increment"
8848 \begin_layout Standard
8853 environment, nested inside of
8854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8862 So, it's at level #4.
8863 We did this by entering
8866 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8872 arg "depth-increment"
8875 , then changing the paragraph environment to
8880 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
8896 \begin_layout Standard
8901 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
8904 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8910 \begin_layout Labeling
8911 \labelwidthstring MMM
8912 #4-a This is level #4.
8916 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8919 and changed the paragraph environment back to
8924 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
8928 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
8933 keep nesting things inside
8934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8938 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8945 \begin_layout Labeling
8946 \labelwidthstring MMM
8947 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar \ldots{}
8952 \begin_layout Labeling
8953 \labelwidthstring MMM
8954 #6-a \SpecialChar \ldots{}
8955 and this is level #6.
8956 By now, you should know how we made these two.
8960 \begin_layout Labeling
8961 \labelwidthstring MMM
8962 #5-b Back to level #5.
8966 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8972 arg "depth-decrement"
8979 \begin_layout Labeling
8980 \labelwidthstring MMM
8984 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8990 arg "depth-decrement"
8993 , we're back at level #4.
8997 \begin_layout Labeling
8998 \labelwidthstring MMM
8999 #3-b Back to level #3.
9000 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9004 \begin_layout Labeling
9005 \labelwidthstring MMM
9006 #2-b Back to level #2.
9011 \begin_layout Labeling
9012 \labelwidthstring MMM
9013 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9014 After this sentence, we will enter
9018 and change the paragraph environment back to
9025 \begin_layout Standard
9026 We could have also used the
9042 environment in place of the
9047 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9050 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9051 Example 2: Inheritance
9054 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9055 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9058 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9067 arg "depth-increment"
9071 \begin_inset Newline newline
9074 which, we will change to the
9082 \begin_layout Enumerate
9087 environment, at level #2.
9090 \begin_layout Enumerate
9091 Notice how the nested
9095 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9099 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9103 \begin_layout Standard
9104 We ended this example by entering
9109 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9113 and reset the nesting depth by using
9116 arg "depth-decrement"
9122 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9123 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9132 \begin_inset Argument 1
9135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9136 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9144 \begin_layout Enumerate
9145 This is level #1, in an
9149 paragraph environment.
9150 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9154 \begin_layout Enumerate
9159 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9165 arg "depth-increment"
9169 Now, what happens if we nest an
9173 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9174 label be? An asterisk?
9178 \begin_layout Itemize
9188 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9189 So, its label is a bullet.
9190 (We got here by using
9193 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9199 arg "depth-increment"
9202 , then changing the environment to
9210 \begin_layout Itemize
9211 Here's level #4, produced using
9214 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9220 arg "depth-increment"
9224 We will do that again\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9229 \begin_layout Enumerate
9230 \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9232 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9237 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9241 , because we are in the
9249 environment (that is, it is an
9264 \begin_layout Enumerate
9269 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9270 type of numbering does LyX use?
9273 \begin_layout Enumerate
9274 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9277 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9280 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9283 \begin_layout Enumerate
9287 arg "depth-decrement"
9290 to decrease the depth after the next
9293 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9300 \begin_layout Enumerate
9302 Look what type of label LyX is using!
9306 \begin_layout Enumerate
9308 Even though we've changed levels, LyX is still using a lowercase Roman
9309 numeral as the label.Why?
9312 \begin_layout Enumerate
9313 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9322 Notice, however, that LyX
9326 reset the counter for the label.
9330 \begin_layout Enumerate
9334 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9340 arg "depth-decrement"
9343 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9344 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9345 into the twofold-nested
9353 \begin_layout Enumerate
9354 The same thing happens if we do another
9357 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9363 arg "depth-decrement"
9366 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9369 \begin_layout Standard
9370 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9375 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9389 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label LyX uses for
9395 The same rule applies for the
9399 environment, as well.
9402 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9403 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9406 \begin_layout Enumerate
9407 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9408 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9409 the same detail with how we did it.
9418 \begin_layout Standard
9426 arg "depth-increment"
9433 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9434 the example in parentheses someplace.
9435 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9436 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9437 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9441 \begin_layout Enumerate
9446 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9451 Now we will add verse.
9452 \begin_inset Newline newline
9455 It will get much worse.
9456 \begin_inset Newline newline
9466 arg "depth-increment"
9477 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9478 \begin_inset Newline newline
9481 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9482 \begin_inset Newline newline
9488 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9501 \begin_layout Standard
9502 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9508 \begin_layout Standard
9510 \begin_inset Tabular
9511 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9512 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
9513 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9514 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
9557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9603 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9613 arg "depth-increment"
9619 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9629 arg "depth-decrement"
9636 \begin_layout Enumerate
9641 : level #1) This is another item.
9642 Note that selecting a
9646 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
9647 3 times to put the table inside the
9655 \begin_layout Quotation
9656 We're now ending the
9660 list and changing to
9665 We're still at level #1.
9666 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
9667 The next set of paragraphs is a
9668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9675 We will nest both the
9682 \begin_inset space ~
9687 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
9691 for the letter body.
9695 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9698 to preserve the depth.
9699 Remember that you need to use
9702 arg "newline-insert newline"
9705 to create multiple lines inside the
9712 \begin_inset space ~
9722 \begin_layout Right Address
9724 \begin_inset Newline newline
9727 Moosegroin, MT 00100
9728 \begin_inset Newline newline
9734 \begin_layout Address
9736 \begin_inset space ~
9742 \begin_layout Quotation
9743 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
9744 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9747 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
9748 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
9749 a backlog in our orders for methane.
9750 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
9751 as soon as possible.
9752 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
9755 \begin_layout Quotation
9756 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
9757 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
9758 with your order, along with payment.
9761 \begin_layout Quotation
9762 We thank you again for your patience.
9765 \begin_layout Address
9767 \begin_inset Newline newline
9774 \begin_layout Quotation
9775 That ends that example!
9778 \begin_layout Standard
9779 As you can see, nesting environments in LyX gives you a lot of power with
9780 just a few keystrokes.
9781 We could have easily nested an
9802 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
9805 \begin_layout Section
9806 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
9807 \begin_inset Index idx
9810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9819 \begin_layout Standard
9820 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
9821 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, LyX offers
9822 you more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
9823 be broken at the end of a line.
9824 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
9828 \begin_layout Subsection
9830 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9832 name "sub:Protected-Space"
9837 \begin_inset Index idx
9840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9849 \begin_layout Standard
9850 The protected space: It is used to tell LyX (and LaTeX) not to break the
9852 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
9856 Further documentation is given in section
9857 \begin_inset Newline newline
9861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9863 reference "sec:Bibliography"
9871 \begin_layout Standard
9872 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
9873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9877 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9885 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9887 reference "sec:Bibliography"
9892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9896 A protected space is set with
9898 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
9899 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
9901 \begin_inset space ~
9909 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
9915 \begin_layout Subsection
9917 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9919 name "sub:Horizontal-Space"
9924 \begin_inset Index idx
9927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9928 Spacing ! Horizontal
9936 \begin_layout Standard
9937 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
9939 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
9940 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
9944 The length units are listed in Appendix
9945 \begin_inset space ~
9949 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9951 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
9958 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9960 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9962 name "sub:Inter-word-Space"
9967 \begin_inset Index idx
9970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9979 \begin_layout Standard
9980 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
9981 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
9982 at the ends of sentences.
9983 There is no need to do this as LyX automatically takes care about this.
9984 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
9985 followed by a period; see section
9986 \begin_inset space ~
9990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9992 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
9997 To insert a normal space, select
9999 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10000 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10002 \begin_inset space ~
10010 arg "space-insert normal"
10016 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10018 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10020 name "sub:Thin-Space"
10025 \begin_inset Index idx
10028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10037 \begin_layout Standard
10039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10046 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10047 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10055 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10056 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10057 inside abbreviations:
10060 \begin_layout Quote
10062 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10066 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10069 \begin_layout Standard
10070 or between values and units.
10071 Compare for example this:
10072 \begin_inset Newline newline
10076 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10080 \begin_inset Newline newline
10083 10 kg (normal space
10086 \begin_layout Standard
10087 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10089 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10090 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10092 \begin_inset space ~
10100 arg "space-insert thin"
10106 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10110 \begin_layout Standard
10111 You can also insert the following space types:
10114 \begin_layout Description
10116 \begin_inset space ~
10120 \begin_inset space ~
10123 space A line with a
10124 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10128 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10132 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10135 negative thin space between the arrows.
10138 \begin_layout Description
10140 \begin_inset space ~
10144 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10148 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10152 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10156 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10160 \begin_inset space ~
10164 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10167 em) space between the arrows.
10170 \begin_layout Description
10172 \begin_inset space ~
10176 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10180 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10184 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10188 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10192 \begin_inset space ~
10196 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10199 em) space between the arrows.
10202 \begin_layout Description
10204 \begin_inset space ~
10208 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10212 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10216 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10220 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10224 \begin_inset space ~
10228 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10231 em) space between the arrows.
10234 \begin_layout Description
10236 \begin_inset space ~
10240 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10244 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10249 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10256 cm space between the arrows.
10259 \begin_layout Standard
10261 \begin_inset space ~
10265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10267 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10271 lists the different space sizes.
10274 \begin_layout Standard
10275 \begin_inset Float table
10280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10282 \begin_inset Caption
10284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10285 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10287 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10291 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10301 \begin_inset Tabular
10302 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="8" columns="2">
10303 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
10304 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10305 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10345 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10369 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10393 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10417 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10432 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10445 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10460 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10473 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10488 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10501 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10522 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10528 \begin_inset Index idx
10531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10540 \begin_layout Standard
10541 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special LyX feature for adding extra space
10542 in a uniform fashion.
10543 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
10544 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
10545 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
10546 equally between themselves.
10549 \begin_layout Standard
10550 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
10553 \begin_layout Quote
10555 This is on the left side
10556 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10559 This is on the right
10562 \begin_layout Quote
10565 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10569 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10575 \begin_layout Quote
10578 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10582 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10586 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10592 \begin_layout Standard
10593 That was an example in the
10599 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10603 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10607 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10610 is one in a standard paragraph.
10611 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
10615 sitting in-between the two arrows.
10618 \begin_layout Standard
10619 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
10622 \begin_inset space ~
10627 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
10630 \begin_layout Standard
10632 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
10636 \begin_inset space ~
10642 \begin_layout Standard
10644 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
10648 \begin_inset space ~
10654 \begin_layout Standard
10656 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
10660 \begin_inset space ~
10666 \begin_layout Standard
10668 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
10672 \begin_inset space ~
10678 \begin_layout Standard
10680 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
10684 \begin_inset space ~
10690 \begin_layout Standard
10692 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
10696 \begin_inset space ~
10702 \begin_layout Standard
10703 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10711 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
10715 in the first line in a paragraph, LyX ignores it.
10716 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
10717 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
10721 option in the space dialog.
10729 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10731 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10733 name "sub:Phantom-Space"
10738 \begin_inset Index idx
10741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10750 \begin_layout Standard
10751 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
10752 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
10755 \begin_layout Standard
10756 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
10759 What is correct English?:
10760 \begin_inset Newline newline
10764 \begin_inset Newline newline
10768 \begin_inset space ~
10771 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
10772 \begin_inset Newline newline
10776 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
10779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10787 \begin_inset Newline newline
10791 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
10794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10802 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
10808 \begin_layout Standard
10810 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
10811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10815 \begin_inset space ~
10819 \begin_inset space ~
10823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10827 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
10829 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10830 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10834 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
10836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10840 \begin_inset space ~
10844 \begin_inset space ~
10848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10851 into the phantom inset (note the space after
10852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10860 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
10861 That is why it is named
10862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10870 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
10871 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
10875 \begin_layout Subsection
10877 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10879 name "sub:Vertical-Space"
10884 \begin_inset Index idx
10887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10896 \begin_layout Standard
10897 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
10899 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10900 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10902 \begin_inset space ~
10908 There you find the following sizes:
10911 \begin_layout Standard
10924 are LaTeX sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
10929 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
10931 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10932 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10934 \begin_inset space ~
10940 \begin_inset Index idx
10943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10944 Document ! Settings
10949 for the paragraph separation.
10950 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
10961 \begin_layout Standard
10967 \begin_inset Index idx
10970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10976 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
10977 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
10982 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
10983 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
10992 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
10996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11001 s are described in section
11002 \begin_inset space ~
11006 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11008 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
11017 If there are several
11021 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11022 You can therefore use
11026 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11029 \begin_layout Standard
11034 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11035 \begin_inset space ~
11039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11041 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11048 \begin_layout Standard
11049 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11059 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11060 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11072 \begin_layout Subsection
11073 Paragraph Alignment
11074 \begin_inset Index idx
11077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11078 Paragraph ! Alignment
11086 \begin_layout Standard
11087 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11089 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11092 dialog (toolbar button
11095 arg "layout-paragraph"
11099 There are five possibilities:
11102 \begin_layout Itemize
11110 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11116 \begin_layout Itemize
11124 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11130 \begin_layout Itemize
11138 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11144 \begin_layout Itemize
11152 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11158 \begin_layout Itemize
11166 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11172 \begin_layout Standard
11173 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11174 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11175 the left and right margins.
11176 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11179 \begin_layout Standard
11181 This paragraph is right aligned,
11184 \begin_layout Standard
11186 this one is centered,
11189 \begin_layout Standard
11191 this one is left aligned.
11194 \begin_layout Subsection
11196 \begin_inset Index idx
11199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11200 Page breaks ! Forced
11206 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11208 name "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11215 \begin_layout Standard
11216 If you don't like the way LaTeX does the page breaks in your document, you
11217 can force a page break where you want one.
11218 Normally this will not be necessary, because LaTeX is good at page breaking.
11219 Only if you use a lot of
11223 , LaTeX's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11226 \begin_layout Standard
11227 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11228 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11232 have to change the page breaking.
11235 \begin_layout Standard
11236 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11238 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11240 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11241 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11243 \begin_inset space ~
11249 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11251 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11252 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11254 \begin_inset space ~
11259 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11261 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11262 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11265 \begin_layout Standard
11266 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11267 at the top of a page.
11268 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11269 LyX gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11270 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11271 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11275 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11279 to learn more about
11286 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11288 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11290 name "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11295 \begin_inset Index idx
11298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11299 Page breaks ! Clear
11307 \begin_layout Standard
11308 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
11309 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
11310 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
11311 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
11312 it, if necessary by adding pages.
11315 \begin_layout Standard
11316 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
11318 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11319 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11321 \begin_inset space ~
11327 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
11329 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11330 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11332 \begin_inset space ~
11336 \begin_inset space ~
11341 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
11342 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
11345 \begin_layout Subsection
11347 \begin_inset Index idx
11350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11357 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11359 name "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
11366 \begin_layout Standard
11367 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
11369 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
11371 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11372 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11374 \begin_inset space ~
11378 \begin_inset space ~
11386 arg "newline-insert newline"
11390 Another type that is inserted via the menu
11392 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11393 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11395 \begin_inset space ~
11399 \begin_inset space ~
11407 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
11410 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
11412 This is useful to avoid
11413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11420 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
11423 \begin_layout Standard
11424 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct LaTeX's line breaking, as
11425 LaTeX is very good at line breaking.
11426 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
11427 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
11428 \begin_inset space ~
11432 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11434 reference "sec:Quote"
11439 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11441 reference "sec:Verse"
11446 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11448 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
11455 \begin_layout Subsection
11457 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11459 name "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
11464 \begin_inset Index idx
11467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11476 \begin_layout Standard
11478 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11489 \begin_layout Standard
11493 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11494 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11496 \begin_inset space ~
11501 you can insert horizontal lines.
11502 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
11503 of the current text line or the paragraph.
11504 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
11507 \begin_layout Standard
11509 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11520 \begin_layout Section
11521 Characters and Symbols
11524 \begin_layout Standard
11525 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
11526 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
11527 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
11529 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11533 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11535 reference "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
11539 for information on how this is done.
11542 \begin_layout Standard
11543 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
11548 dialog via the menu
11550 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11551 Special Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11557 \begin_layout Standard
11558 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11566 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
11567 when you are using a special screen font in LyX's preferences.
11568 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
11576 \begin_layout Section
11577 Fonts and Text Styles
11578 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11580 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
11587 \begin_layout Subsection
11589 \begin_inset Index idx
11592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11601 \begin_layout Standard
11602 There are two types of fonts:
11605 \begin_layout Description
11607 \begin_inset space ~
11611 \begin_inset Index idx
11614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11620 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
11621 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11625 characters) in the font.
11626 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
11627 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
11628 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
11629 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
11630 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
11631 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
11632 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
11633 \begin_inset Newline newline
11636 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
11637 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
11638 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
11639 sizes than at small ones.
11640 \begin_inset Newline newline
11654 \begin_inset space ~
11662 \begin_layout Description
11664 \begin_inset space ~
11668 \begin_inset Index idx
11671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11677 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
11678 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
11679 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
11680 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
11681 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
11682 image manipulation program.
11683 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
11684 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
11685 \begin_inset space ~
11688 pixels high up to 34
11689 \begin_inset space ~
11692 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
11693 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
11694 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
11696 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
11697 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
11698 \begin_inset Newline newline
11701 Bitmap fonts are named
11704 \begin_inset space ~
11709 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
11712 \begin_layout Standard
11713 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
11714 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
11715 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
11716 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
11717 use scalable fonts.
11720 \begin_layout Standard
11721 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
11724 \begin_layout Standard
11725 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
11726 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
11727 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
11728 font to emphasize text, you use an
11729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11737 This concept fits in perfectly with LyX.
11738 In LyX, you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
11742 \begin_layout Subsection
11744 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11746 name "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
11753 \begin_layout Standard
11754 Traditionally, LaTeX used its own fonts.
11755 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
11756 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your LaTeX
11758 The reason is that LaTeX needs some extra information about the fonts,
11759 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
11760 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
11761 to a word processor.
11762 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
11763 are generally of very good quality, and that LaTeX files are very portable
11764 across different machines.
11765 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional LaTeX has increased a
11766 lot in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
11768 In LyX, only a subset of these are directly selectable via the user interface
11770 \begin_inset space ~
11774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11776 reference "sub:Document-Font"
11781 However, all the others are available if you enter the relevant LaTeX code
11782 in the document preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired
11786 \begin_layout Standard
11787 Recent developments brought some new LaTeX engines that are also able directly
11788 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely XeTeX
11790 Both engines are supported by LyX.
11791 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
11792 that is installed on your system.
11793 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
11796 \begin_layout Standard
11797 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11805 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
11806 es; so you might have to experiment.
11814 \begin_layout Standard
11815 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11823 XeTeX and especially LuaTeX, are still rather new and thus not as mature
11824 as traditional LaTeX or PDFTeX.
11832 \begin_layout Subsection
11833 Document Font and Font size
11834 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11836 name "sub:Document-Font"
11841 \begin_inset Index idx
11844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11851 \begin_inset Index idx
11854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11863 \begin_layout Standard
11864 You can set the document fonts in the
11866 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11870 \begin_inset Index idx
11873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11874 Document ! Settings
11884 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
11885 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
11888 \begin_inset space ~
11897 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
11898 for (some) sans serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit
11899 with the roman font.
11902 \begin_layout Standard
11909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11918 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
11919 This requires that you use
11925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11964 as the output format, i.
11965 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11969 \begin_inset space \space{}
11972 you will have to have either XeTeX or LuaTeX installed (see section
11973 \begin_inset space ~
11977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11979 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
11984 You will then not have access to TeX's own fonts.
11985 Note that LyX then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists
11987 \begin_inset space ~
11990 serif, and typewriter), since LyX cannot determine the family.
11991 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
11992 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar \slash{}
11994 LyX cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
11997 \begin_layout Standard
11998 If you use TeX fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the
12003 and a list of fonts available with your LaTeX distribution.
12008 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12009 In most cases, this will be the standard TeX font, known as
12010 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12016 \begin_inset space ~
12022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12035 European Computer Modern
12038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12045 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12048 \begin_layout Standard
12057 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12058 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12063 This problem doesn't appear if you read PDFs in
12066 \begin_inset space ~
12071 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12077 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12078 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12081 \begin_layout Itemize
12085 \begin_inset space ~
12090 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12103 \begin_inset space ~
12108 was developed for the LaTeX community in order to replace
12112 as the default font.
12113 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12114 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12117 \begin_inset space ~
12130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12131 One difference is improved kerning.
12139 \begin_layout Itemize
12143 \begin_inset space ~
12147 \begin_inset space ~
12152 fonts in (the rare) case that
12155 \begin_inset space ~
12160 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12175 Virtual means that it
12176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12187 -glyphs from other fonts.
12188 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12202 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12210 Loading the LaTeX-package
12215 \begin_inset Index idx
12218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12219 LaTeX-packages ! aeguill
12224 with the document preamble line
12225 \begin_inset Newline newline
12232 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12233 \begin_inset Newline newline
12238 will fix the guillemet problem.
12243 and that accented characters are not
12247 glyph, but built of
12251 characters, the accent and the letter.
12252 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12258 If you search for example for the French word
12259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12266 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12275 and not for the glyph
12276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12280 \begin_inset space ~
12284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12290 \begin_layout Itemize
12291 If you do not like the look of
12299 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12300 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12304 \begin_inset space ~
12310 \begin_inset space ~
12320 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
12321 \begin_inset space ~
12324 serif and typewriter fonts,
12328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12329 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
12330 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12336 \begin_inset space ~
12345 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
12346 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12350 \begin_inset space \space{}
12358 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12362 \begin_inset space \space{}
12368 \begin_inset space ~
12376 \begin_inset space ~
12386 but you can also select your own.
12387 \begin_inset Newline newline
12390 The differences between roman,
12393 \begin_inset space ~
12402 fonts are explained in section
12403 \begin_inset space ~
12407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12409 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12414 \begin_inset Newline newline
12420 \begin_inset space ~
12425 was originally designed for newspapers.
12426 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
12427 into the small newspaper columns.
12431 \begin_inset space ~
12436 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
12439 \begin_layout Standard
12440 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
12453 Some classes provide additional sizes.
12458 depends on the class you are using.
12459 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
12462 \begin_layout Standard
12463 Note that the font size is the
12468 That means that LyX scales all other possible font sizes (such as those
12469 used in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
12470 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
12473 \begin_inset space ~
12479 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
12480 \begin_inset space ~
12484 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12486 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12493 \begin_layout Standard
12497 \begin_inset space ~
12502 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
12504 \begin_inset space ~
12507 serif or typewriter.
12512 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
12522 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
12525 \begin_layout Standard
12534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12543 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
12549 \begin_inset Index idx
12552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12553 LaTeX-packages ! fontenc
12559 \begin_inset space ~
12563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12565 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
12570 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
12571 Unless you have specific reasons, use
12578 \begin_layout Standard
12579 With some fonts, the checkboxes
12581 Use Old Style Figures
12585 Use True Small Caps
12588 These are extra features some fonts provide.
12591 Use Old Style Figures
12593 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
12595 Old style figures are the numerals (0
12596 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12600 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12603 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
12607 Use True Small Caps
12609 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
12610 of scaled capitals.
12611 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
12612 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
12615 \begin_layout Standard
12620 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
12621 a font to display the script characters.
12625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12626 The font will be the argument for the commands of the LaTeX-package
12631 \begin_inset Index idx
12634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12635 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
12640 So this has no effect for the document language
12654 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
12658 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12666 When you choose a new font or font size, LyX does
12670 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
12671 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
12672 LyX's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
12674 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12677 dialog, see section
12678 \begin_inset space ~
12682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12684 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
12696 \begin_layout Subsection
12697 Using Different Character Styles
12698 \begin_inset Index idx
12701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12708 \begin_inset Index idx
12711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12720 \begin_layout Standard
12721 As we've already seen, LyX automatically changes the character style for
12722 certain paragraph environments.
12723 LyX supports two character styles,
12732 You can activate both of these styles via keybindings, the menus, and the
12736 \begin_layout Standard
12741 style, do one of the following:
12744 \begin_layout Itemize
12745 click on the toolbar button
12754 \begin_layout Itemize
12755 use the key binding
12764 \begin_layout Standard
12765 These commands are all toggles.
12770 style is already active, they deactivate it.
12773 \begin_layout Standard
12774 One typically uses the
12778 style for proper names.
12780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12787 is the original author of LyX.
12788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12794 \begin_layout Standard
12795 A more widely used character style is the
12800 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
12807 \begin_layout Itemize
12808 clicking on the toolbar button
12817 \begin_layout Itemize
12818 using the keybindings
12827 \begin_layout Standard
12832 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or LaTeX-packag
12833 es use a different font.
12836 \begin_layout Standard
12837 We've been using the
12841 style all over the place in this document.
12842 Here's one more example:
12845 \begin_layout Quotation
12848 Do not overuse character styles!
12851 \begin_layout Standard
12852 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
12853 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
12854 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
12855 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
12859 \begin_layout Standard
12860 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
12868 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12870 \begin_inset space ~
12873 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12879 arg "dialog-show character"
12885 \begin_layout Subsection
12886 Fine-Tuning with the
12891 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12893 name "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12898 \begin_inset Index idx
12901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12910 \begin_layout Standard
12911 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
12912 LyX gives you a way to create a custom character style.
12913 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
12914 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
12915 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
12916 from ordinary dialog.
12919 \begin_layout Standard
12920 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
12921 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
12922 \begin_inset Newline newline
12925 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
12926 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
12929 \begin_layout Standard
12930 To use custom character styles, open the
12932 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12934 \begin_inset space ~
12937 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12940 dialog or press the toolbar button
12943 arg "dialog-show character"
12947 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
12948 font property that you can choose.
12949 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
12952 \begin_inset space ~
12957 , which keeps the current state of that property.
12962 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
12963 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
12964 environments all at once.
12967 \begin_layout Standard
12968 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
12971 \begin_inset space ~
12983 \begin_layout Labeling
12984 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
12990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12998 The possible options are:
13002 \begin_layout Labeling
13003 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13008 This is the Roman font family.
13009 Normally a serif font.
13010 It's also the default family.
13020 \begin_layout Labeling
13021 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13025 \begin_inset space ~
13032 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13044 \begin_layout Labeling
13045 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13052 This is the Typewriter font family.
13058 arg "font-typewriter"
13067 \begin_layout Labeling
13068 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13073 This corresponds to the print weight.
13078 \begin_layout Labeling
13079 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13084 This is the Medium font series.
13085 It's also the default series.
13088 \begin_layout Labeling
13089 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13096 This is the Bold font series.
13109 \begin_layout Labeling
13110 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13115 As the name implies.
13120 \begin_layout Labeling
13121 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13126 This is the Upright font shape.
13127 It's also the default shape.
13130 \begin_layout Labeling
13131 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13145 s the Italic font shape
13151 \begin_layout Labeling
13152 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13159 This is the Slanted font shape
13161 (although it might not be visible in LyX, this is different from italic).
13164 \begin_layout Labeling
13165 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13169 \begin_inset space ~
13176 This is the Small caps font shape
13183 \begin_layout Labeling
13184 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13189 Alters the text color.
13190 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
13194 \begin_inset space ~
13199 , which means that the document default color set in
13201 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13202 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13208 \begin_inset space ~
13213 is used, you can choose between
13246 \begin_inset Index idx
13249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13258 \begin_layout Labeling
13259 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13264 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
13265 the language of the document.
13266 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
13268 \begin_inset Newline newline
13271 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
13272 LaTeX respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
13273 When using the spell checking (see section
13274 \begin_inset space ~
13278 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13280 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
13284 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
13287 \begin_layout Labeling
13288 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13293 Alters the size of the font.
13294 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
13295 proportional to the document font size.
13296 Once again, you don't feed LyX the details, but a general description of
13297 what you want to do.
13302 \begin_layout Labeling
13303 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13324 arg "font-size tiny"
13330 \begin_layout Labeling
13331 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13352 arg "font-size scriptsize"
13358 \begin_layout Labeling
13359 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13380 arg "font-size footnotesize"
13386 \begin_layout Labeling
13387 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13408 arg "font-size small"
13414 \begin_layout Labeling
13415 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13429 It's also the default size.
13433 arg "font-size normal"
13439 \begin_layout Labeling
13440 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13461 arg "font-size large"
13467 \begin_layout Labeling
13468 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13489 arg "font-size larger"
13495 \begin_layout Labeling
13496 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13517 arg "font-size largest"
13523 \begin_layout Labeling
13524 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13545 arg "font-size huge"
13551 \begin_layout Labeling
13552 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13573 arg "font-size giant"
13579 \begin_layout Labeling
13580 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13585 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
13586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13605 arg "font-size increase"
13611 \begin_layout Labeling
13612 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13617 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
13618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13637 arg "font-size decrease"
13644 \begin_layout Standard
13649 : don't go crazy with this feature.
13650 You should almost never need to change the font size.
13651 LyX automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
13652 — use those instead.
13653 This is here for fine-tuning only!
13656 \begin_layout Labeling
13657 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13662 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
13667 \begin_layout Labeling
13668 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13675 This is text with emphasize on
13678 This might seem like the same as
13682 , but it is actually a bit different.
13688 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
13690 Normally this font is equal to italic.
13693 \begin_layout Labeling
13694 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13701 This is text with Underbar on.
13707 arg "font-underline"
13713 \begin_inset Newline newline
13718 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
13719 when you could not change fonts.
13720 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
13721 This is only possible in LyX because some people
13725 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
13728 \begin_layout Labeling
13729 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13733 \begin_inset space ~
13740 This is text with Double underbar on.
13746 arg "font-underunderline"
13750 \begin_inset Newline newline
13753 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
13754 about double underbar.
13757 \begin_layout Labeling
13758 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13762 \begin_inset space ~
13769 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
13775 arg "font-underwave"
13779 \begin_inset Newline newline
13782 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
13783 Keep antinausea pills handy.
13786 \begin_layout Labeling
13787 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13794 This is text with Strikeout on.
13800 arg "font-strikeout"
13804 \begin_inset Newline newline
13807 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
13808 changed in the meantime.
13811 \begin_layout Labeling
13812 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13819 This is text with Noun on.
13826 , this is a logical attribute.
13827 Normally it's equivalent to
13830 \begin_inset space ~
13839 \begin_layout Standard
13840 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
13841 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
13843 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13845 \begin_inset space ~
13848 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13854 arg "dialog-show character"
13857 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
13858 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
13861 arg "textstyle-apply"
13865 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
13869 \begin_layout Standard
13870 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
13877 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
13878 (suppose you just set the shape to
13879 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13897 \begin_inset space ~
13909 \begin_layout Standard
13910 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
13918 \begin_inset space ~
13930 \begin_layout Itemize
13936 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13940 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13943 font, which means every character has the same width; the
13944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13961 \begin_inset Newline newline
13965 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
13968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13979 \begin_inset Note Note
13982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13983 For more on phantoms see section
13984 \begin_inset space ~
13988 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13990 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
14000 \begin_inset Newline newline
14006 \begin_layout Itemize
14011 fonts use characters with serifs.
14012 These are the small
14013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14017 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14020 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14021 The following example shows the difference:
14022 \begin_inset Newline newline
14026 \begin_inset Newline newline
14031 text without serifs
14034 \begin_inset Newline newline
14037 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14038 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14045 \begin_layout Itemize
14050 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14051 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14052 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14055 \begin_layout Standard
14056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14063 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14064 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14067 \begin_inset space ~
14072 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14073 the property to be removed.
14074 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14075 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14076 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14094 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14095 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14103 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14107 \begin_inset space ~
14112 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
14115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14123 If you, for example, set
14124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14142 \begin_inset space ~
14147 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
14149 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14156 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
14159 \begin_layout Standard
14160 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
14161 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
14164 \begin_layout Section
14165 Printing and Previewing
14168 \begin_layout Subsection
14172 \begin_layout Standard
14173 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
14174 using LyX, you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
14175 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
14176 goes on behind-the-scenes.
14177 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
14179 Additional Features
14184 \begin_layout Standard
14185 LyX uses the program LaTeX as its backend.
14186 LaTeX is just a macro package for the TeX typesetting system, but to prevent
14187 confusion, we will only refer to LaTeX.
14188 LyX is what you use to do your actual writing.
14189 Then, LyX calls LaTeX to turn your writing into printable output.
14190 This happens in two stages:
14193 \begin_layout Enumerate
14194 First, LyX converts your document to a series of text commands for LaTeX,
14195 generating a file with the extension,
14196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14204 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14210 \begin_layout Enumerate
14211 Next, LyX calls LaTeX to use the commands in the
14215 file to produce printable output.
14218 \begin_layout Subsection
14219 Output file formats
14220 \begin_inset Index idx
14223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14230 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14232 name "sub:Output-file-formats"
14239 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14240 Simple text (ASCII)
14241 \begin_inset Index idx
14244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14245 File formats ! ASCII
14253 \begin_layout Standard
14254 This file type has the extension
14255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14267 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
14268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14271 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
14272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14278 \begin_layout Standard
14279 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
14281 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14282 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14284 \begin_inset space ~
14290 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
14291 a BibTeX bibliography (section
14292 \begin_inset space ~
14296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14298 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
14303 If your document includes such material, use
14305 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14306 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14308 \begin_inset space ~
14312 \begin_inset space ~
14316 \begin_inset space ~
14324 \begin_inset space ~
14328 \begin_inset space ~
14334 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
14335 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
14338 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14340 \begin_inset Index idx
14343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14344 File formats ! LaTeX
14352 \begin_layout Standard
14353 This file type has the extension
14354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14365 and contains all commands that are necessary for the LaTeX program to process
14367 If you know LaTeX, you can use it to find out LaTeX-Errors or to process
14368 it manually with console commands.
14369 The LaTeX-file is automatically created in LyX's temporary directory whenever
14370 you view or export your document.
14373 \begin_layout Standard
14374 You can export your document as a LaTeX-file using the menu
14376 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14377 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14392 The different LaTeX export variants are explained in section
14393 \begin_inset space ~
14397 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14399 reference "sub:Export"
14406 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14408 \begin_inset Index idx
14411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14420 \begin_layout Standard
14421 This file type has the extension
14422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14442 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
14443 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
14444 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
14448 \begin_layout Standard
14449 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
14450 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
14451 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
14452 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
14453 when you view the DVI.
14454 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
14457 \begin_layout Standard
14458 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
14460 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14461 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14466 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14467 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14469 \begin_inset space ~
14476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14486 The latter option uses the program
14495 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
14496 font access (see section
14497 \begin_inset space ~
14501 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14503 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
14508 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
14509 standard TeX processor.
14512 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14514 \begin_inset Index idx
14517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14518 File formats ! PostScript
14526 \begin_layout Standard
14527 This file type has the extension
14528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14540 PostScript was developed by the company
14544 as a printer language.
14545 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
14547 PostScript can be seen as a
14548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14551 programming language
14552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14555 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
14559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14560 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the LaTeX-pack
14566 \begin_inset Index idx
14569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14570 LaTeX-packages ! pstricks
14580 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
14583 \begin_layout Standard
14584 PostScript can only contain images in the format
14585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14588 Encapsulated PostScript
14589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14592 (EPS, file extension
14593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14605 As LyX allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has
14606 to convert them in the background to EPS.
14607 If, for example, you have 50
14608 \begin_inset space ~
14611 images in your document, LyX has to do 50
14612 \begin_inset space ~
14615 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
14616 This might slow down your workflow with LyX.
14617 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
14618 EPS to avoid this problem.
14621 \begin_layout Standard
14622 You can export to PostScript using the menu
14624 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14625 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14631 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14633 \begin_inset Index idx
14636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14643 \begin_inset Index idx
14646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14655 \begin_layout Standard
14656 This file type has the extension
14657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14673 Portable Document Format
14674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14681 was derived from PostScript.
14682 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
14684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14691 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
14692 looks exactly the same.
14695 \begin_layout Standard
14696 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
14697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14700 Joint Photographic Experts Group
14701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14704 (JPG, file extension
14705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14732 Portable Network Graphics
14733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14736 (PNG, file extension
14737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14749 You can also use any other image format, because LyX converts them in the
14750 background to one of these formats.
14751 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
14752 will slow down your workflow.
14753 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
14756 \begin_layout Standard
14757 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
14759 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14765 \begin_layout Description
14767 \begin_inset space ~
14770 (pdflatex) This uses the program
14774 which converts your file directly to PDF.
14777 \begin_layout Description
14779 \begin_inset space ~
14786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14793 X) This uses the program
14797 which converts your file directly to PDF.
14802 is a new engine, derived from
14806 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
14807 access (see section
14808 \begin_inset space ~
14812 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14814 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
14819 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
14820 standard TeX processor.
14823 \begin_layout Description
14825 \begin_inset space ~
14832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14839 X) This uses the program
14843 that converts your file directly to PDF.
14848 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
14849 font access (see section
14850 \begin_inset space ~
14854 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14856 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
14861 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
14862 vertically written Japanese.
14865 \begin_layout Description
14867 \begin_inset space ~
14870 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
14874 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
14878 \begin_layout Description
14880 \begin_inset space ~
14883 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
14887 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
14888 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
14892 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
14893 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
14896 \begin_layout Standard
14900 \begin_inset space ~
14909 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
14910 works without problems.
14911 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar \slash{}
14912 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
14916 \begin_inset space ~
14923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14935 \begin_inset space ~
14942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14951 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
14959 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14961 \begin_inset Index idx
14964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14965 FileFormats ! XHTML
14971 \begin_inset Index idx
14974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14983 \begin_layout Standard
14984 This file type has the extension
14985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14993 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14997 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
14998 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
14999 When LyX produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15000 suitable for the purpose.
15001 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15003 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15004 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15007 between different formats, which are described in section
15009 Math Output in XHTML
15014 \begin_inset space ~
15022 \begin_layout Standard
15023 XHTML output remains
15024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15031 , and not all LyX features are supported yet.
15034 LyX and the World Wide Web
15038 Additional Features
15040 manual, for more information.
15043 \begin_layout Standard
15044 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15046 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15047 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15053 \begin_layout Subsection
15055 \begin_inset Index idx
15058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15067 \begin_layout Standard
15068 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15069 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15078 or use the toolbar button
15085 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15086 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15087 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15093 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15097 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15099 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15103 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15105 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15110 Further output formats can be selected via
15112 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15113 View (Other Formats)
15115 or the toolbar button
15116 \begin_inset Graphics
15117 filename ../images/view-others.png
15119 groupId toolbarbuttons
15126 \begin_layout Standard
15127 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
15128 viewer window using the menu
15130 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15135 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15136 Update (Other Formats)
15141 \begin_layout Standard
15142 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in LyX's temporary
15144 To have a real output, export your document.
15147 \begin_layout Subsection
15148 Printing the File from within LyX
15149 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15151 name "sub:Printing-the-File"
15158 \begin_layout Standard
15159 Instead of exporting your file and then printing it, you can also print
15160 it directly from within LyX.
15161 To print a file, select the menu
15163 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15169 arg "dialog-show print"
15172 ) or click on the toolbar button
15175 arg "dialog-show print"
15179 LyX will internally call LaTeX to produce a DVI.
15180 This file is then processed by the program
15184 to a PostScript-file, which is finally printed using the program
15189 Due to these steps in the background, this method is not the fastest.
15192 \begin_layout Standard
15193 You can set the following print parameters in the
15196 \begin_inset space ~
15204 \begin_layout Labeling
15205 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15210 This is the name of the printer to print to.
15214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15215 Note that this printer name is for the program
15224 has to be configured for this printer name.
15225 The default printer can be set in LyX's preferences dialog, see section
15226 \begin_inset space ~
15230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15232 reference "sub:Printer"
15241 The printer should understand PostScript.
15244 \begin_layout Labeling
15245 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15250 The name of a file to print to.
15251 The output will be a PostScript file.
15252 It will be written in LyX's working directory unless you specify the full
15256 \begin_layout Standard
15257 You can choose to print only a range of pages, only even-numbered or only
15258 odd-numbered pages or to print the pages in reverse — the latter options
15259 are useful for printing on two sides with a printer without a duplexer:
15260 you re-insert the pages after printing one set to print on the other side.
15261 Some printers spit out pages face-up, others, face-down.
15262 By choosing a particular order to print in, you can take the entire stack
15263 of pages out of the printer without needing to reorder them.
15266 \begin_layout Section
15267 A few Words about Typography
15268 \begin_inset Index idx
15271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15280 \begin_layout Subsection
15281 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
15282 \begin_inset Index idx
15285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15292 \begin_inset Index idx
15295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15304 \begin_layout Standard
15306 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15317 character comes in four lengths: the
15329 , and the minus sign:
15330 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15336 \begin_layout Standard
15337 \begin_inset Tabular
15338 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
15339 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
15340 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15341 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15342 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15343 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15372 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15412 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15437 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15439 \begin_inset space ~
15442 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15449 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15474 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15476 \begin_inset space ~
15479 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15500 \begin_inset Formula $-$
15508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15534 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15540 \begin_layout Standard
15541 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
15542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15553 character multiple times in a row.
15554 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
15555 the final output, but not in LyX.
15557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15561 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15569 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15573 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15577 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15587 \begin_layout Standard
15588 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
15589 math mode and has a length of its own.
15590 Here are some examples:
15593 \begin_layout Enumerate
15594 line- and page-breaks
15595 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15605 \begin_layout Enumerate
15607 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15617 \begin_layout Enumerate
15618 Oh — there's a dash.
15619 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15629 \begin_layout Enumerate
15630 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
15634 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15644 \begin_layout Subsection
15646 \begin_inset Index idx
15649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15656 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15658 name "sub:Hyphenation"
15665 \begin_layout Standard
15666 Words are not hyphenated within LyX but automatically in the output.
15667 Hyphenation is done by the LaTeX-package
15672 \begin_inset Index idx
15675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15676 LaTeX-packages ! babel
15681 following the rules of the document language.
15684 \begin_layout Standard
15685 LaTeX hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
15690 font and with unusual constructs, like
15691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15699 If LaTeX cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points
15701 This is done with the menu
15703 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15704 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15706 \begin_inset space ~
15712 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to LaTeX.
15713 If no hyphenation is necessary, LaTeX will ignore them.
15716 \begin_layout Standard
15717 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
15718 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
15720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15728 LaTeX would then see the hyphen
15729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15736 as a hyphenation possibility.
15737 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
15738 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
15739 as described in section
15740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15743 Prevent Hyphenation
15744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15750 \begin_inset space ~
15758 \begin_layout Subsection
15760 \begin_inset Index idx
15763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15772 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15773 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
15774 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15776 name "sub:Abbreviations"
15783 \begin_layout Standard
15784 When LyX calls LaTeX to generate the final version of your document, LaTeX
15785 automatically distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
15786 LaTeX then adds the
15787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15790 appropriate amount of space.
15791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15794 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
15796 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
15797 gets after another word.
15800 \begin_layout Standard
15801 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
15802 not work in all cases.
15804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15815 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
15816 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
15819 \begin_layout Standard
15820 Here are some examples of
15824 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
15827 \begin_layout Itemize
15832 \begin_layout Itemize
15837 \begin_layout Standard
15838 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
15841 \begin_layout Itemize
15843 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15847 this is too much space!
15850 \begin_layout Itemize
15855 \begin_layout Standard
15856 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
15859 \begin_layout Standard
15860 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
15863 \begin_layout Enumerate
15867 \begin_inset space ~
15872 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
15873 \begin_inset space ~
15877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15879 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
15884 \begin_inset Index idx
15887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15888 Spaces ! inter-word
15896 \begin_layout Enumerate
15900 \begin_inset space ~
15905 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
15906 \begin_inset space ~
15910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15912 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
15917 \begin_inset Index idx
15920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15929 \begin_layout Enumerate
15933 \begin_inset space ~
15937 \begin_inset space ~
15941 \begin_inset space ~
15948 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15950 \begin_inset space ~
15955 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
15956 This function is also bound to
15959 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
15965 \begin_layout Standard
15966 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
15969 \begin_layout Itemize
15971 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15975 \begin_inset space \space{}
15978 this is too much space!
15981 \begin_layout Itemize
15982 This is I\SpecialChar \@.
15986 \begin_layout Standard
15987 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
15988 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because LaTeX
15989 will take care of this.
15992 \begin_layout Standard
15993 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
15997 \begin_inset space ~
16002 feature described in the section
16008 Additional Features
16013 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16015 \begin_inset Index idx
16018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16019 Typography ! Quotes
16025 \begin_inset Index idx
16028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16059 \begin_layout Standard
16060 LyX usually sets quotes correctly.
16061 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16062 and use a closing quote at the end.
16064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16072 The keyboard character,
16076 , generates this automatically.
16079 \begin_layout Standard
16080 You can specify what character the
16084 key produces using the submenu
16090 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16094 \begin_inset Index idx
16097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16098 Document ! Settings
16108 There are six choices:
16111 \begin_layout Labeling
16112 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16135 \begin_layout Labeling
16136 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16139 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16143 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16149 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16153 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16159 \begin_layout Labeling
16160 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16163 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16167 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16173 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16177 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16183 \begin_layout Labeling
16184 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16187 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16191 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16197 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16201 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16207 \begin_layout Labeling
16208 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16211 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16215 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16221 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16225 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16231 \begin_layout Labeling
16232 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16235 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16239 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16245 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16249 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16255 \begin_layout Standard
16256 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
16259 arg "quote-insert single"
16265 \begin_layout Subsection
16267 \begin_inset Index idx
16270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16271 Typography ! Ligatures
16277 \begin_inset Index idx
16280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16309 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16311 name "sub:Ligatures"
16318 \begin_layout Standard
16319 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
16320 print them as single characters.
16321 These groups are known as
16326 Since LaTeX knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too
16328 Here are the standard ligatures:
16331 \begin_layout Itemize
16335 \begin_layout Itemize
16339 \begin_layout Itemize
16343 \begin_layout Itemize
16347 \begin_layout Itemize
16351 \begin_layout Standard
16352 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
16355 \begin_layout Standard
16356 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
16357 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
16358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16365 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
16366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16381 To break a ligature, use
16383 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16384 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16386 \begin_inset space ~
16393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16404 cuff\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
16406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16421 Dorf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
16423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16429 \begin_layout Subsection
16431 \begin_inset Index idx
16434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16441 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16443 name "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
16450 \begin_layout Standard
16451 You will certainly have noticed that the word “LaTeX” always appears with
16452 characters in different sizes and heights.
16453 LaTeX is the name of the program used by LyX and is therefore recognized
16454 as a proper name when you type it in LyX as
16455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16474 \begin_inset Note Note
16477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16478 The braces in TeX Code are here to avoid that the
16479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16486 appear as proper name in the output, see the last paragraph of this section.
16487 To create proper names omit the TeX Code.
16492 Note the order of the upper- and lowercase letters! LyX recognizes the
16493 following proper names:
16496 \begin_layout Description
16497 LyX The name of the game, write
16498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16519 \begin_layout Description
16520 TeX The program used by LaTeX, write
16521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16542 \begin_layout Description
16543 LaTeX The program used by LyX, write
16544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16565 \begin_layout Description
16566 LaTeX2e The actual version of LaTeX, write
16567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16588 \begin_layout Standard
16589 You might wonder why the LaTeX-version is
16590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16594 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
16598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16602 It is an old tradition in the TeX-world to give programs geek version numbers.
16603 For example the version number of TeX converges to the number
16604 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
16607 : The actual version is
16608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16612 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16615 , the previous one was
16616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16626 \begin_layout Standard
16627 If you don't want to use proper names, for example, in section headings,
16628 you can insert two empty braces in TeX Code in the word.
16629 In LyX this will look like
16630 \begin_inset Graphics
16631 filename clipart/LaTeX.png
16637 \begin_inset Newline newline
16640 For more about TeX Code, see section
16641 \begin_inset space ~
16645 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16647 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
16654 \begin_layout Subsection
16656 \begin_inset Index idx
16659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16668 \begin_layout Standard
16669 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
16670 space between two words.
16671 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
16674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16681 for units use the menu
16683 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16684 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16686 \begin_inset space ~
16694 arg "space-insert thin"
16700 \begin_layout Standard
16701 Here is an example to show the differences:
16704 \begin_layout Standard
16705 \begin_inset Tabular
16706 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
16707 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
16708 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16709 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16716 \begin_inset space ~
16720 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
16728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16732 space between number and unit
16739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16744 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16748 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
16756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16760 half space between number and unit
16773 \begin_layout Subsection
16775 \begin_inset Index idx
16778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16779 Typography ! Widows and orphans
16787 \begin_layout Standard
16788 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
16790 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
16791 You may remember once printing out a document, only to find the heading
16792 for a new section printed at the very bottom of the page, the first line
16793 of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom of a page, or the last line
16794 of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
16795 These bits of text became known as
16806 \begin_layout Standard
16807 Clearly, LyX can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
16808 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
16809 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
16810 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
16811 built into LaTeX governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there
16812 specifically to prevent widows and orphans.
16813 This is the advantage LyX has in using LaTeX as its backend.
16816 \begin_layout Standard
16817 We cannot go into how TeX and LaTeX decide to break a page, or how you can
16818 tweak that behavior.
16819 Some LaTeX books listed in the bibliography (such as
16820 \begin_inset space ~
16824 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
16826 key "latexcompanion"
16831 \begin_inset space ~
16835 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
16841 ) may have more information.
16842 You will almost never need to worry about this, however.
16845 \begin_layout Chapter
16846 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
16847 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16849 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
16856 \begin_layout Standard
16857 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
16860 \begin_inset space ~
16866 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
16869 \begin_layout Section
16871 \begin_inset Index idx
16874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16881 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16890 \begin_layout Standard
16891 LyX offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
16894 \begin_layout Description
16896 \begin_inset space ~
16899 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
16900 \begin_inset Newline newline
16904 \begin_inset Note Note
16907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16908 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
16916 \begin_layout Description
16917 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
16918 a LaTeX-comment when you export the document to LaTeX via the menu
16920 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16921 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16934 \begin_inset space ~
16940 \begin_inset Newline newline
16944 \begin_inset Note Comment
16947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16948 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in LaTeX-files.
16956 \begin_layout Description
16958 \begin_inset space ~
16961 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
16962 set in the document settings under
16964 Colors\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16966 \begin_inset space ~
16972 \begin_inset Newline newline
16976 \begin_inset Newline newline
16980 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
16983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16989 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
16990 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
16995 of a comment that appears in the output.
17001 \begin_inset Newline newline
17005 \begin_inset Newline newline
17008 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17011 \begin_layout Standard
17012 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17020 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17024 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17027 \begin_layout Section
17029 \begin_inset Index idx
17032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17039 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17041 name "sec:Footnotes"
17048 \begin_layout Standard
17049 LyX uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the
17052 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17055 or the toolbar button
17058 arg "footnote-insert"
17070 \begin_inset Graphics
17071 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
17080 This box is LyX's representation of your footnote.
17090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17109 label, the box will
17113 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17114 Clicking on the box label again will close
17127 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17128 and click on the footnote
17143 \begin_layout Standard
17144 Here is an example footnote:
17152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17153 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17161 \begin_layout Standard
17162 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17163 position where the footnote box is placed.
17164 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17165 The footnote number is calculated by LyX according to the document class.
17166 LyX does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get
17167 other schemes using special LaTeX-commands.
17172 ey are described in the
17175 \begin_inset space ~
17183 \begin_layout Section
17185 \begin_inset Index idx
17188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17195 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17197 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17204 \begin_layout Standard
17205 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in LyX.
17206 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17208 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17210 \begin_inset space ~
17215 or the toolbar button
17218 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17244 appearing within your text.
17245 This box is LyX's representation of your margin
17254 \begin_layout Standard
17255 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17259 \begin_inset Marginal
17262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17264 This is a marginal note.
17272 \begin_layout Standard
17273 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17274 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17275 pages, right on odd pages.
17278 \begin_layout Standard
17279 For further information about marginal notes see the section
17282 \begin_inset space ~
17290 \begin_inset space ~
17298 \begin_layout Section
17299 Graphics and Images
17300 \begin_inset Index idx
17303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17310 \begin_inset Index idx
17313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17320 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17322 name "sec:Graphics"
17329 \begin_layout Standard
17330 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
17331 you want and click on the toolbar icon
17334 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
17339 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17343 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
17346 \begin_layout Standard
17347 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
17352 tab allows you to choose your image file.
17353 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
17355 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
17356 \begin_inset space ~
17360 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17362 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
17369 \begin_layout Standard
17374 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
17375 of the image in the output.
17376 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
17380 \begin_inset space ~
17384 \begin_inset space ~
17393 \begin_inset space ~
17397 \begin_inset space ~
17401 \begin_inset space ~
17406 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
17407 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
17415 \begin_layout Standard
17422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17430 \begin_inset space ~
17434 \begin_inset space ~
17441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17450 tab LaTeX experts can specify additional LaTeX options.
17451 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside LyX.
17455 \begin_inset space ~
17460 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
17461 with the image size is printed.
17465 \begin_inset space ~
17469 \begin_inset space ~
17473 \begin_inset space ~
17478 is explained in the
17481 \begin_inset space ~
17493 \begin_layout Standard
17494 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
17495 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
17497 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
17500 \begin_layout Standard
17502 \begin_inset Graphics
17503 filename clipart/mobius.eps
17511 \begin_layout Standard
17512 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
17513 the image into a float, see section
17514 \begin_inset space ~
17518 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17520 reference "sub:Figure-Floats"
17527 \begin_layout Subsection
17529 \begin_inset Index idx
17532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17539 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17541 name "sub:Image-Formats"
17548 \begin_layout Standard
17549 You can insert images in any known file format.
17550 But as we explained in section
17551 \begin_inset space ~
17555 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17557 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
17561 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
17562 LyX therefore uses the program
17566 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
17567 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
17568 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
17569 \begin_inset space ~
17573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17575 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
17582 \begin_layout Standard
17583 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
17586 \begin_layout Description
17588 \begin_inset space ~
17591 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
17592 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
17593 Well-known bitmap image formats are
17594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17597 Graphics Interchange Format
17598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17601 (GIF, file extension
17602 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17614 \begin_inset Index idx
17617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17649 Portable Network Graphics
17650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17653 (PNG, file extension
17654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17666 \begin_inset Index idx
17669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17701 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17705 (JPG, file extension
17706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17730 \begin_inset Index idx
17733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17764 \begin_layout Description
17766 \begin_inset space ~
17769 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
17771 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
17772 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
17773 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
17774 \begin_inset Newline newline
17777 Scalable image formats can be
17778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17781 Scalable Vector Graphics
17782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17785 (SVG, file extension
17786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17798 \begin_inset Index idx
17801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17833 Encapsulated PostScript
17834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17837 (EPS, file extension
17838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17846 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17850 \begin_inset Index idx
17853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17885 Portable Document Format
17886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17889 (PDF, file extension
17890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17902 \begin_inset Index idx
17905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17917 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17920 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
17921 result will not be scalable.
17922 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
17927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17928 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
17936 \begin_layout Standard
17937 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
17944 \begin_layout Subsection
17945 Grouping of Image Settings
17946 \begin_inset Index idx
17949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17950 Images ! Settings grouping
17958 \begin_layout Standard
17959 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
17961 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
17962 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
17964 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
17965 need to manually change each of them.
17969 \begin_layout Standard
17970 A new group can be set by pressing the button
17973 \begin_inset space ~
17977 \begin_inset space ~
17992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18000 \begin_inset space ~
18004 \begin_inset space ~
18011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18021 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18022 and checking the name of the desired group.
18025 \begin_layout Section
18027 \begin_inset Index idx
18030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18037 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18046 \begin_layout Standard
18047 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18050 arg "tabular-insert"
18055 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18059 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18060 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18061 from the rest of the table.
18062 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18063 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18065 Here is an example table:
18068 \begin_layout Standard
18070 \begin_inset Tabular
18071 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18072 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
18073 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18074 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18075 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18076 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18276 \begin_layout Subsection
18280 \begin_layout Standard
18281 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
18284 More\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18288 This brings up the table dialog.
18289 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
18290 cursor is placed currently.
18291 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18292 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18293 done on all of your selection.
18296 \begin_layout Standard
18297 In addition to the table dialog, the
18300 \begin_inset space ~
18305 helps you in setting table properties.
18306 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
18309 \begin_layout Standard
18313 \begin_inset space ~
18318 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18319 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18320 current cell respectively.
18321 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18323 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18324 of text, see section
18325 \begin_inset space ~
18329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18331 reference "sub:Table-Cells"
18338 \begin_layout Standard
18339 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
18340 using the check box
18349 This will merge the cells to
18353 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
18354 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
18355 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
18356 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
18357 in the last row without the upper border:
18360 \begin_layout Standard
18362 \begin_inset Tabular
18363 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
18364 <features rotate="0" firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
18365 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18366 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
18367 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18368 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18379 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18388 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18464 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18499 \begin_layout Standard
18500 Adept users can declare special LaTeX-arguments for the table.
18501 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
18502 explained in the chapter
18509 \begin_inset space ~
18515 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table 90
18516 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18519 degrees counterclockwise.
18520 These rotations are not visible in LyX but are visible in the output.
18523 \begin_layout Standard
18524 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18532 Most DVI-viewers are
18536 able to display rotations.
18544 \begin_layout Standard
18549 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
18554 adds lines for all cell borders.
18557 \begin_layout Subsection
18559 \begin_inset Index idx
18562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18563 Tables ! Longtables
18569 \begin_inset Index idx
18572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18581 \begin_layout Standard
18582 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
18585 \begin_inset space ~
18589 \begin_inset space ~
18598 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
18599 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
18602 \begin_layout Description
18607 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
18608 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
18609 except for the first page, if
18612 \begin_inset space ~
18620 \begin_layout Description
18624 \begin_inset space ~
18629 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
18630 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
18633 \begin_layout Description
18638 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
18639 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
18640 except for the last page, if
18643 \begin_inset space ~
18651 \begin_layout Description
18655 \begin_inset space ~
18660 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
18661 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
18664 \begin_layout Description
18665 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
18666 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
18668 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18672 More about longtable captions can be found in the
18675 \begin_inset space ~
18683 \begin_layout Standard
18684 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
18685 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
18686 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
18692 In this context, first means first in this order:
18695 \begin_inset space ~
18707 \begin_inset space ~
18712 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
18715 \begin_layout Standard
18717 \begin_inset Tabular
18718 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
18719 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
18720 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
18721 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18722 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18723 <row endfirsthead="true">
18724 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18730 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
18735 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18744 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18754 <row endfirsthead="true">
18755 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18766 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18775 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18787 <row endhead="true">
18788 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18799 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18808 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18818 <row endhead="true">
18819 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18830 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18839 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18851 <row endfoot="true">
18852 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18863 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18872 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18903 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19844 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19853 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
19856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19862 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19873 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19904 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19935 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19966 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19997 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20028 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20059 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20090 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20121 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20152 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20183 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20214 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20245 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20276 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20307 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20338 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20369 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20400 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20431 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20462 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20493 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20524 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20555 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20586 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20617 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20648 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20679 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20710 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20741 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20772 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20803 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20833 <row endlastfoot="true">
20834 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20845 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20854 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20871 \begin_layout Subsection
20873 \begin_inset Index idx
20876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20883 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20885 name "sub:Table-Cells"
20892 \begin_layout Standard
20893 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
20894 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
20895 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
20896 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
20900 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
20903 \begin_layout Standard
20904 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
20905 for the column in the table dialog.
20906 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
20907 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
20911 \begin_layout Standard
20913 \begin_inset Tabular
20914 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
20915 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
20916 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20917 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
20918 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20938 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21007 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21063 This is longer now.
21068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21119 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21120 This is longer now.
21125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21151 \begin_layout Standard
21152 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21153 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21158 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21159 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21165 Selection with the mouse or with
21169 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21170 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21171 the selection from outside the table.
21174 \begin_layout Section
21176 \begin_inset Index idx
21179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21186 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21195 \begin_layout Subsection
21199 \begin_layout Standard
21200 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21201 have a fixed location.
21203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21210 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21218 \begin_inset space ~
21223 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21224 too many notes on the current page.
21227 \begin_layout Standard
21228 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21229 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21230 and pages without text.
21231 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21232 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21233 Floats are therefore numbered.
21234 Referencing is described in section
21235 \begin_inset space ~
21239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21241 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21248 \begin_layout Standard
21249 To insert a float, use the menu
21251 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21255 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21256 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21258 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21259 \begin_inset Index idx
21262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21268 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21269 paragraph within the float.
21270 To keep your LyX-document readable, you can open and close the float box
21271 by left-clicking on the box label.
21272 A closed float box looks like this:
21273 \begin_inset Graphics
21274 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
21279 – a gray button with a red label.
21282 \begin_layout Standard
21283 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible LaTeX-errors
21284 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21287 \begin_layout Subsection
21291 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21293 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21295 name "sub:Figure-Floats"
21300 \begin_inset Index idx
21303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21304 Floats ! Figure floats
21312 \begin_layout Standard
21314 \begin_inset space ~
21318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21320 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21324 was created using the menu
21326 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21327 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21333 arg "float-insert figure"
21337 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
21340 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21346 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21350 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
21351 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
21353 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21355 \begin_inset space ~
21363 arg "layout-paragraph"
21369 \begin_layout Standard
21370 \begin_inset Float figure
21375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21377 \begin_inset Graphics
21378 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21388 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21391 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21393 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21397 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
21410 \begin_layout Standard
21411 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
21412 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
21414 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21423 ) and refer to it using the menu
21425 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21431 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
21435 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
21436 vague references like
21437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21444 , because, as LaTeX will reposition the floats in the final document, it
21446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21454 For more about cross-references, see section
21455 \begin_inset space ~
21459 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21461 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21468 \begin_layout Standard
21469 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
21470 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
21471 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
21472 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
21473 as described in section
21474 \begin_inset space ~
21478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21480 reference "sub:List-of-Figures"
21486 \begin_inset space ~
21490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21492 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
21496 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
21497 You can also set the images one below the other.
21499 \begin_inset space ~
21503 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21505 reference "fig:Undefinable"
21510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21512 reference "fig:Platypus"
21516 are the subfigures.
21519 \begin_layout Standard
21520 \begin_inset Float figure
21525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21526 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21530 \begin_inset Float figure
21535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21536 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21539 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21541 name "fig:Undefinable"
21553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21554 \begin_inset Graphics
21555 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
21566 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21570 \begin_inset Float figure
21575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21576 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21579 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21581 name "fig:Platypus"
21593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21594 \begin_inset Graphics
21595 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21607 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21614 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21617 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21619 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
21623 Two distorted images.
21636 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21638 \begin_inset Index idx
21641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21642 Floats ! Table floats
21650 \begin_layout Standard
21651 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
21653 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21654 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21657 or the toolbar button
21660 arg "float-insert table"
21664 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
21665 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
21666 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
21668 \begin_inset space ~
21672 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21674 reference "tab:Table-float"
21681 \begin_layout Standard
21682 \begin_inset Float table
21687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21688 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21691 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21693 name "tab:Table-float"
21705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21707 \begin_inset Tabular
21708 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
21709 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
21710 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21711 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21712 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21839 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
21847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21860 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
21863 \end{array}\right]$
21871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21884 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
21905 \begin_layout Subsection
21907 \begin_inset Index idx
21910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21919 \begin_layout Standard
21920 LyX offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
21921 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
21922 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
21924 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
21932 \begin_inset space ~
21940 \begin_layout Section
21942 \begin_inset Index idx
21945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21954 \begin_layout Standard
21955 LaTeX provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page,
21957 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
21958 \begin_inset space \space{}
21965 \begin_layout Standard
21966 Minipages in LyX have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
21968 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21972 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
21973 and its alignment within the page.
21976 \begin_layout Standard
21978 \begin_inset Box Frameless
21988 height_special "totalheight"
21991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21994 This is a minipage.
21995 The text is set in an italic style.
21998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22001 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22002 another formatting.
22010 \begin_layout Standard
22011 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22014 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22018 as described in section
22019 \begin_inset space ~
22023 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22025 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
22030 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22036 \begin_layout Standard
22037 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22047 height_special "totalheight"
22050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22051 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22052 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22058 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22062 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22072 height_special "totalheight"
22075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22076 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22077 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22085 \begin_layout Standard
22086 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22092 \begin_layout Standard
22093 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22095 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22102 \begin_inset space ~
22110 \begin_layout Chapter
22111 Mathematical Formulas
22112 \begin_inset Index idx
22115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22122 \begin_inset Index idx
22125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22154 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22156 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22163 \begin_layout Standard
22164 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22169 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22172 \begin_layout Section
22174 \begin_inset Index idx
22177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22186 \begin_layout Standard
22187 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22200 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22202 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22203 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22204 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22206 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22212 \begin_layout Standard
22213 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22217 \begin_inset space ~
22222 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22225 \begin_layout Standard
22226 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22227 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22230 \begin_layout Standard
22231 This is a line with an inline formula
22232 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22238 \begin_layout Standard
22239 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22240 paragraph, like this one:
22241 \begin_inset Formula
22248 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22251 \begin_layout Standard
22252 LyX also supports many LaTeX math commands.
22253 For example, typing
22254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22267 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22268 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22272 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22275 \begin_inset space ~
22283 \begin_layout Subsection
22284 Navigating in Formulas
22285 \begin_inset Index idx
22288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22297 \begin_layout Standard
22298 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22299 achieved with the arrow keys.
22300 LyX uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22301 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22306 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22307 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22311 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22315 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22318 \end{array}\right]$
22326 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22331 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22332 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22335 \begin_layout Standard
22340 , printed in this document as
22341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22345 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22352 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
22353 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
22354 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
22359 For example, if you want
22360 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
22368 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22378 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22382 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22387 , since in the latter case only the
22390 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
22395 will be under the square root sign:
22396 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
22402 \begin_layout Standard
22403 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
22405 \begin_inset Formula
22407 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
22416 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
22417 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
22420 \begin_layout Subsection
22424 \begin_layout Standard
22425 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
22426 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
22430 and a cursor movement key to select text.
22431 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
22432 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
22433 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
22434 but not in a normal text region in LyX.
22437 \begin_layout Subsection
22438 Exponents and Subscripts
22439 \begin_inset Index idx
22442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22449 \begin_inset Index idx
22452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22461 \begin_layout Standard
22462 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
22465 arg "math-superscript"
22471 arg "math-subscript"
22474 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
22476 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
22479 , type in a formula
22482 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22492 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
22498 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
22502 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
22508 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22514 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
22516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22523 , you have to use an extra
22527 to separate the circumflex and the character.
22528 For example, if you want
22529 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
22535 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22541 Subscripts are similar: To get
22542 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
22548 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22556 \begin_layout Subsection
22558 \begin_inset Index idx
22561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22570 \begin_layout Standard
22571 Create a fraction either with the command
22577 or by using the icon
22580 arg "math-insert \\frac"
22586 \begin_inset space ~
22592 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
22593 The cursor is above the fraction line.
22594 To move it to the bottom, simply press
22599 To move back up, press
22604 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
22605 \begin_inset Formula
22607 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
22610 \end{array}\right)}\right]
22618 \begin_layout Subsection
22620 \begin_inset Index idx
22623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22632 \begin_layout Standard
22633 Roots can be created using the
22636 \begin_inset space ~
22644 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
22650 arg "math-insert \\root"
22672 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
22678 always produces a square root.
22681 \begin_layout Subsection
22682 Operators with Limits
22683 \begin_inset Index idx
22686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22693 \begin_inset Index idx
22696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22703 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22705 name "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
22712 \begin_layout Standard
22714 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
22718 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
22721 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
22722 These limits can be entered in LyX by entering them as you would enter
22723 a super- or subscript, directly after the symbol.
22724 The sum operator will automatically place its
22725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22732 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
22734 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
22738 \begin_inset Formula
22740 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
22745 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
22749 \begin_layout Standard
22750 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
22752 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
22753 behind the operator and using the menu
22755 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22756 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22758 \begin_inset space ~
22762 \begin_inset space ~
22776 \begin_layout Standard
22777 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
22778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22786 \begin_inset Index idx
22789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22796 \begin_inset Formula
22798 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
22803 which will place the
22804 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
22808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22816 In inline formulas it looks like this:
22817 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
22823 \begin_layout Standard
22824 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
22831 Have a look at section
22832 \begin_inset space ~
22836 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22838 reference "sub:Functions"
22842 for an explanation of function macros.
22845 \begin_layout Subsection
22847 \begin_inset Index idx
22850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22859 \begin_layout Standard
22860 Most math symbols can be found in the
22863 \begin_inset space ~
22868 under one of several categories; including
22885 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
22889 \begin_layout Standard
22890 If you know the LaTeX-command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
22891 you don't have to use the
22894 \begin_inset space ~
22899 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
22900 LyX will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
22903 \begin_layout Subsection
22905 \begin_inset Index idx
22908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22917 \begin_layout Standard
22918 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
22923 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
22929 \begin_inset space ~
22939 arg "math-insert \\space"
22945 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
22946 For example, the sequence
22951 \begin_inset Formula $a\, b$
22955 \begin_inset Graphics
22956 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
22961 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
22962 the space marker and enter space again several times.
22963 With every space enter the size will be changed.
22964 Some markers for the space size appear red in LyX, because they are negative
22966 Here are two examples:
22969 \begin_layout Standard
22979 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
22985 \begin_layout Standard
22995 \begin_inset Formula $a\! b$
23001 \begin_layout Subsection
23003 \begin_inset Index idx
23006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23013 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23015 name "sub:Functions"
23022 \begin_layout Standard
23026 \begin_inset space ~
23031 contains under the button
23036 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23041 a number of function macros, such as
23042 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23046 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23054 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23061 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23062 avoid confusions, because
23063 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23067 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23073 \begin_layout Standard
23074 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23076 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23080 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23086 \begin_layout Standard
23087 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23088 are placed, as described in section
23089 \begin_inset space ~
23093 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23095 reference "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23102 \begin_layout Subsection
23104 \begin_inset Index idx
23107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23116 \begin_layout Standard
23117 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23119 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23120 You can also use LaTeX commands, for example, to enter
23121 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23124 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23125 Our example is entered by typing
23130 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23137 \begin_inset space ~
23141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23143 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23147 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23150 \begin_layout Standard
23151 \begin_inset Float table
23156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23157 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23160 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23162 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23166 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23176 \begin_inset Tabular
23177 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23178 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
23179 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23180 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23181 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23265 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23319 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23373 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
23383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23427 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
23437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23481 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
23491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23535 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
23545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23589 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
23599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23643 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
23653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23697 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
23707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23742 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
23763 \begin_layout Standard
23764 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
23767 \begin_inset space ~
23775 arg "math-insert \\hat"
23778 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
23782 \begin_layout Section
23783 Brackets and Delimiters
23784 \begin_inset Index idx
23787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23794 \begin_inset Index idx
23797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23804 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23806 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
23813 \begin_layout Standard
23814 There are several brackets available through LyX.
23815 For some purposes, using just the keys
23820 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
23821 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
23822 toolbar delimiter icon
23825 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
23829 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
23830 \begin_inset Formula
23832 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
23840 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
23841 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
23845 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
23848 and the expression on the right was entered using the
23854 \begin_inset Formula
23856 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
23864 \begin_layout Standard
23865 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
23866 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
23870 \begin_layout Standard
23871 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
23872 left side and right side.
23873 If you use the option
23876 \begin_inset space ~
23881 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
23882 The selection will be shown as TeX code.
23883 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
23888 It will appear in LyX with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
23891 \begin_layout Standard
23892 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
23893 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
23894 is to go inside the brackets.
23895 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
23900 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
23901 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
23902 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
23906 arg "math-delim ( )"
23912 \begin_layout Section
23913 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
23914 \begin_inset Index idx
23917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23924 \begin_inset Index idx
23927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23934 \begin_inset Index idx
23937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23938 Math ! Multi-line Equations
23946 \begin_layout Standard
23947 Matrices are entered in LyX using the
23950 \begin_inset space ~
23960 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
23966 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
23967 Here is an example:
23968 \begin_inset Formula
23970 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23979 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
23980 \begin_inset space ~
23984 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23986 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
23991 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
23992 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
23993 This alignment is set in the box
23998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24010 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24035 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24046 for every column as default.
24047 For example, the sequence
24048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24059 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24060 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24061 corresponds to the relevant column.
24062 The result will look like this:
24063 \begin_inset Formula
24066 this & this\, column & this\, column\\
24067 column & has & has\, right\\
24068 has\, left\, alignment & center\, alignment & alignment
24077 \begin_layout Standard
24078 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24081 arg "newline-insert newline"
24084 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24085 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24087 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24090 or the math toolbar.
24093 \begin_layout Standard
24094 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24095 It can be created with the menu
24097 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24098 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24100 \begin_inset space ~
24112 Here is an example:
24113 \begin_inset Formula
24127 \begin_layout Standard
24128 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24131 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24134 arg "newline-insert newline"
24138 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24143 arg "newline-insert newline"
24146 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24154 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24155 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24156 A new row is created by every further entry of
24159 arg "newline-insert newline"
24163 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24164 Here is an example:
24165 \begin_inset Formula
24167 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24168 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24173 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24174 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24175 \begin_inset Formula
24177 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24185 \begin_layout Standard
24186 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24193 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24194 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24195 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24197 reference "eq:asquared"
24202 The other types are described in section
24203 \begin_inset space ~
24207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24209 reference "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
24216 \begin_layout Section
24217 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24218 \begin_inset Index idx
24221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24222 Math ! Formula numbering
24228 \begin_inset Index idx
24231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24232 Math ! Referencing formulas
24238 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24240 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24247 \begin_layout Standard
24248 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24250 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24251 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24253 \begin_inset space ~
24257 \begin_inset space ~
24265 arg "math-number-toggle"
24269 The formula number appears in LyX within parentheses.
24270 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
24271 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24272 the document class.
24273 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24274 separated by a dot:
24275 \begin_inset Formula
24285 arg "math-number-toggle"
24288 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24289 You can only number displayed formulas.
24292 \begin_layout Standard
24293 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24295 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24296 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24298 \begin_inset space ~
24302 \begin_inset space ~
24310 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
24313 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
24314 \begin_inset Formula
24317 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
24323 To number all lines use the shortcut
24326 arg "math-number-toggle"
24332 \begin_layout Standard
24333 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24336 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
24337 A label is inserted with the menu
24339 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24348 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
24349 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24350 It is recommended that you use the suggested
24351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24362 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
24363 label type when you have many labels in your document.
24364 We inserted in the following example the label
24365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24372 in the second line:
24373 \begin_inset Formula
24375 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
24376 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
24381 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
24382 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
24383 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
24385 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24387 \begin_inset space ~
24395 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24399 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
24400 The reference appears in LyX as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
24401 as the formula number:
24404 \begin_layout Standard
24405 This is a cross-reference to equation (
24406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24408 reference "eq:tanhExp"
24415 \begin_layout Standard
24416 The properties of LyX's cross-reference box are described in section
24417 \begin_inset space ~
24421 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24423 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24428 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
24436 \begin_layout Section
24437 User defined math macros
24438 \begin_inset Index idx
24441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24450 \begin_layout Standard
24451 LyX allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
24452 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
24453 Math macros are explained in section
24456 \begin_inset space ~
24468 \begin_layout Section
24472 \begin_layout Subsection
24474 \begin_inset Index idx
24477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24486 \begin_layout Standard
24487 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
24488 To set a font in a formula, use the
24491 \begin_inset space ~
24501 arg "math-insert \\font"
24506 , or enter its command, listed in table
24507 \begin_inset space ~
24511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24513 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
24520 \begin_layout Standard
24521 \begin_inset Float table
24526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24527 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24530 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24532 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
24536 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
24544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24546 \begin_inset Tabular
24547 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
24548 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
24549 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24550 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24582 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
24590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24609 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
24617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24636 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
24644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24669 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
24677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24696 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
24704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24723 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
24731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24757 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
24765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24784 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
24792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24818 \begin_layout Standard
24819 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
24822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24827 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
24843 \begin_layout Standard
24844 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
24845 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
24850 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
24851 space when you need a space in the box.
24852 Here is an example where
24853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24864 denotes the set of numbers:
24865 \begin_inset Formula
24867 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\: x\in\mathbb{N}
24875 \begin_layout Standard
24876 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
24877 You can, for example, put a character in
24886 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
24890 \begin_inset Newline newline
24893 So it is better not to use this feature.
24896 \begin_layout Standard
24897 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
24898 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
24902 \begin_inset Newline newline
24905 You can only print them emboldened using the command
24911 , which works like the other typeface commands:
24912 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
24918 \begin_layout Standard
24925 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
24928 \begin_layout Standard
24929 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
24931 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24932 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24934 \begin_inset space ~
24942 \begin_layout Subsection
24944 \begin_inset Index idx
24947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24956 \begin_layout Standard
24957 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
24959 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
24963 \begin_inset space ~
24967 \begin_inset space ~
24975 \begin_inset space ~
24985 arg "math-insert \\font"
24997 Math text appears in LyX in black instead of blue.
24998 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
24999 Here is an example:
25000 \begin_inset Formula
25003 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25004 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25013 \begin_layout Subsection
25015 \begin_inset Index idx
25018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25027 \begin_layout Standard
25028 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25029 automatically chosen in most situations.
25047 For most characters,
25055 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25056 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25061 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25062 situations, all text will be set in the styles that LaTeX thinks are appropriat
25064 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25069 arg "math-insert \\style"
25075 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25076 For example, you can set
25077 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25080 , which is normally in
25089 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25093 The four styles are used in the following example:
25096 \begin_layout Standard
25097 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25101 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25105 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25109 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25115 \begin_layout Standard
25116 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25117 is set in a particular size with the menu
25119 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25121 \begin_inset space ~
25126 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25127 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25128 will be adjusted to correspond.
25129 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25140 \begin_layout Standard
25144 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25150 \begin_layout Section
25152 \begin_inset Index idx
25155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25162 \begin_inset Index idx
25165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25174 \begin_layout Standard
25175 LyX supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society
25176 (AMS) that are in common use.
25179 \begin_layout Subsection
25180 Enabling AMS-Support
25183 \begin_layout Standard
25184 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25185 the document by selecting the checkbox
25188 \begin_inset space ~
25192 \begin_inset space ~
25196 \begin_inset space ~
25203 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25207 \begin_inset Index idx
25210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25211 Document ! Settings
25219 \begin_inset space ~
25225 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get LaTeX-errors in
25226 formulas, ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25229 \begin_layout Subsection
25231 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25233 name "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
25238 \begin_inset Index idx
25241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25242 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25250 \begin_layout Standard
25251 AMS-LaTeX provides a selection of different formula types.
25252 LyX allows you to choose between
25273 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
25274 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25280 , for an explanation of these formula types.
25283 \begin_layout Chapter
25287 \begin_layout Section
25289 \begin_inset Index idx
25292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25299 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25301 name "sec:Cross-References"
25308 \begin_layout Standard
25309 One of LyX's strengths is cross-references.
25310 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25312 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25313 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25314 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25317 \begin_layout Enumerate
25321 \begin_layout Enumerate
25322 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25324 name "enu:Second-item"
25331 \begin_layout Enumerate
25335 \begin_layout Standard
25336 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25338 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25341 or by pressing the toolbar button
25348 A gray label box like this:
25349 \begin_inset Graphics
25350 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
25355 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25356 LyX offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25391 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
25392 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
25394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25408 \begin_layout Standard
25409 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
25411 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25414 or the toolbar button
25417 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25421 A gray cross-reference box like this:
25422 \begin_inset Graphics
25423 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
25428 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
25430 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
25431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25443 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
25447 \begin_layout Standard
25448 As an alternative to
25450 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25453 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
25458 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
25459 to the actual cursor position via the menu
25461 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25473 \begin_layout Standard
25474 Here is our cross-reference: Item
25475 \begin_inset space ~
25479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25481 reference "enu:Second-item"
25488 \begin_layout Standard
25489 It is recommended to use a protected space
25493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25494 described in section
25495 \begin_inset space ~
25499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25501 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
25510 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
25511 line breaks between them.
25514 \begin_layout Standard
25515 There are six formats of cross-references:
25518 \begin_layout Description
25519 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
25520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25522 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25529 \begin_layout Description
25530 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
25531 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
25533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25543 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25550 \begin_layout Description
25551 <page>: prints the page number: Page
25552 \begin_inset space ~
25556 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25557 LatexCommand pageref
25558 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25565 \begin_layout Description
25567 \begin_inset space ~
25571 \begin_inset space ~
25574 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
25575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25576 LatexCommand vpageref
25577 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25582 \begin_inset Newline newline
25585 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
25586 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
25587 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
25588 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
25589 it prints “on the next page”.
25590 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
25593 \begin_layout Description
25595 \begin_inset space ~
25599 \begin_inset space ~
25603 \begin_inset space ~
25606 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
25607 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25609 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25614 \begin_inset Newline newline
25617 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
25623 ; otherwise it behaves like
25627 \begin_inset space ~
25631 \begin_inset space ~
25640 \begin_layout Description
25642 \begin_inset space ~
25645 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
25646 \begin_inset Newline newline
25650 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25658 This feature is only available when you have the LaTeX-package
25667 \begin_inset Index idx
25670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25671 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
25677 \begin_inset Index idx
25680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25681 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
25692 \begin_inset Newline newline
25695 You can select which LaTeX-package should be used for this feature by setting
25698 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
25702 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25703 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25711 is the default and preferred because
25715 supports only English documents.
25716 The format is specified by using the command
25728 (refstyle) in the LaTeX preamble of the document.
25729 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
25731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25742 ) can be done with this command
25743 \begin_inset Newline newline
25750 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
25755 \begin_inset Newline newline
25758 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
25760 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25762 key "prettyref,refstyle"
25769 \begin_layout Description
25771 \begin_inset space ~
25774 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
25775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25776 LatexCommand nameref
25777 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25784 \begin_layout Standard
25785 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
25786 is automatically calculated by LaTeX.
25787 The varieties are adjusted in the field
25791 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
25795 \begin_layout Standard
25796 You can only use the style
25800 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
25804 is always possible.
25807 \begin_layout Standard
25808 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
25809 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
25811 Referencing formulas is explained in section
25812 \begin_inset space ~
25816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25818 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
25825 \begin_layout Standard
25826 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
25830 \begin_inset space ~
25834 \begin_inset space ~
25839 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
25840 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
25843 \begin_inset space ~
25848 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
25849 You can also go back with the toolbar button
25852 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
25858 \begin_layout Standard
25859 You can change labels at any time.
25860 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
25861 do not need to think about this.
25864 \begin_layout Standard
25865 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in LyX
25866 “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output
25867 instead of the reference.
25870 \begin_layout Standard
25871 References are described in detail in the section
25872 \begin_inset space ~
25876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25886 \begin_inset space ~
25894 \begin_layout Section
25895 Table of Contents and other Listings
25896 \begin_inset Index idx
25899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25906 \begin_inset Index idx
25909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25916 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25925 \begin_layout Subsection
25927 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25929 name "sub:Table-of-Contents"
25936 \begin_layout Standard
25937 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
25939 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25940 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25942 \begin_inset space ~
25946 \begin_inset space ~
25952 It is displayed in LyX as a gray box.
25953 If you click on it, the
25957 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
25958 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
25959 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
25961 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25963 \begin_inset space ~
25968 that is described in section
25969 \begin_inset space ~
25973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25975 reference "sub:The-Outliner"
25982 \begin_layout Standard
25983 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
25984 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
25986 \begin_inset space ~
25990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25992 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
25996 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
25998 \begin_inset space ~
26002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26004 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
26008 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26010 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26013 \begin_layout Subsection
26014 List of Figures, Tables, and Algorithms
26015 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26017 name "sub:List-of-Figures"
26024 \begin_layout Standard
26025 Table, figure, and algorithm lists are very much like the table of contents.
26026 You can insert them via the
26028 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26032 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26035 \begin_layout Section
26036 URLs and Hyperlinks
26037 \begin_inset Index idx
26040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26047 \begin_inset Index idx
26050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26059 \begin_layout Subsection
26061 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26070 \begin_layout Standard
26071 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26073 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26079 \begin_layout Standard
26080 Here is an example URL: LyX's homepage:
26081 \begin_inset Flex URL
26084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26094 \begin_layout Standard
26095 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26101 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26105 \begin_layout Standard
26106 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26114 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get LaTeX errors.
26122 \begin_layout Subsection
26124 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26126 name "sub:Hyperlinks"
26133 \begin_layout Standard
26134 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26136 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26139 or with the toolbar button
26146 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26155 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26156 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26157 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26159 name "LyX's homepage"
26160 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26164 , an Email address like this:
26165 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26167 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26168 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26173 , or a link to a file.
26176 \begin_layout Standard
26177 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26190 to the link target.
26193 \begin_layout Standard
26194 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26195 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26196 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26197 the text style dialog.
26198 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26202 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26204 name "LyX's homepage"
26205 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26212 \begin_layout Standard
26213 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26217 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26219 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26220 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26224 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26226 \begin_inset Newline newline
26234 \begin_inset Newline newline
26241 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26244 \begin_layout Section
26246 \begin_inset Index idx
26249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26256 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26258 name "sec:Appendices"
26265 \begin_layout Standard
26266 Appendices are created with the menu
26268 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26270 \begin_inset space ~
26274 \begin_inset space ~
26280 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26281 as the appendix part of the book.
26282 This part is marked with a red borderline.
26285 \begin_layout Standard
26286 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
26287 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26288 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26289 and the subsection number.
26290 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26294 \begin_layout Standard
26296 \begin_inset space ~
26300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26302 reference "chap:Credits"
26307 \begin_inset space ~
26311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26313 reference "sub:Export"
26320 \begin_layout Section
26322 \begin_inset Index idx
26325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26332 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26334 name "sec:Bibliography"
26341 \begin_layout Standard
26342 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a LyX-document.
26343 You can include a bibliography database,
26347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26348 Known under the name
26349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26361 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26362 manually, using the paragraph environment
26366 , which was described in section
26367 \begin_inset space ~
26371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26373 reference "sub:Biblio_environment"
26378 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
26379 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
26383 use a bibliography database.
26386 \begin_layout Subsection
26387 The Bibliography Environment
26390 \begin_layout Standard
26395 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
26397 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
26406 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
26408 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about LaTeX
26410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26417 , a short form of its title, as the key.
26420 \begin_layout Standard
26421 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
26423 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26426 or the toolbar button
26429 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
26433 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
26434 containing the available citations.
26435 Select one or more keys from the list and
26445 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
26446 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
26450 \begin_layout Standard
26451 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
26452 entry with surrounding brackets.
26457 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
26458 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
26460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26470 \begin_layout Standard
26473 LaTeX Companion Second Edition
26476 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26478 key "latexcompanion"
26485 \begin_layout Standard
26486 The LyX-Team members are listed in the Credits:
26487 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26496 \begin_layout Standard
26497 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
26500 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26502 \begin_inset space ~
26510 arg "layout-paragraph"
26514 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
26517 \begin_layout Subsection
26518 Bibliography databases (BibTeX)
26519 \begin_inset Index idx
26522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26523 Bibliography ! Databases
26529 \begin_inset Index idx
26532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26533 Bibliography ! BibTeX
26539 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26541 name "sub:Bibliography-databases"
26548 \begin_layout Standard
26549 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
26554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26555 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
26557 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
26558 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
26563 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
26565 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
26566 your working field in a database.
26567 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
26568 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
26569 list for that document.
26570 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
26574 \begin_layout Standard
26575 The database is a text file with the file extension
26576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26587 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
26588 The format is explained in
26589 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26595 and in the LaTeX books (
26596 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26598 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
26603 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
26604 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
26605 A list of such programs is maintained on the LyX Wiki at
26606 \begin_inset Flex URL
26609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26611 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
26619 \begin_layout Standard
26620 To use a database, use the menu
26622 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26627 TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26640 \begin_inset space ~
26646 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
26647 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
26654 Add bibliography to TOC
26656 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
26661 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
26662 in the document or just the cited references.
26665 \begin_layout Standard
26666 The style file is a text file with the file extension
26667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26678 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
26679 Your LaTeX distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
26680 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
26682 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
26687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26688 For information on how this is done, have a look at
26689 \begin_inset Newline newline
26693 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26695 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
26707 \begin_layout Standard
26708 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
26711 \begin_layout Standard
26712 To generate the bibliography from a database, LyX uses the program BibTeX.
26713 You can choose which of its variants should be used by LyX as the
26719 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26720 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26725 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26726 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26727 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26742 The following variants are possible:
26745 \begin_layout Description
26746 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
26747 with other bibliography packages (e.
26748 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
26752 \begin_inset space \space{}
26759 ), only with the package
26763 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
26767 \begin_layout Description
26768 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
26769 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
26770 with all bibliography packages, except
26775 \begin_layout Description
26776 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
26781 , works with all bibliography packages
26784 \begin_layout Standard
26785 BibTeX can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
26787 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
26793 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26802 \begin_layout Standard
26803 When you select the option
26805 Sectioned bibliography
26809 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26810 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26813 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
26814 This and other options are explained in detail in section
26816 Customizing Bibliographies
26824 Additional Features
26829 \begin_layout Standard
26830 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
26831 the two methods of creating them.
26832 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
26833 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
26834 We used the style file
26838 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
26841 \begin_layout Subsection
26842 Bibliography layout
26843 \begin_inset Index idx
26846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26847 Bibliography ! Layout
26855 \begin_layout Standard
26856 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
26857 For this feature you need to enable the option
26863 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26867 \begin_inset Index idx
26870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26871 Document ! Settings
26881 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
26882 For the global citation format use the BibTeX style files as explained
26883 in the previous section.
26886 \begin_layout Standard
26887 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
26888 the citation reference window.
26889 Here is an example where the text
26890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26894 \begin_inset space ~
26898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26901 appears after the reference:
26904 \begin_layout Standard
26906 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26909 key "latexcompanion"
26916 \begin_layout Section
26918 \begin_inset Index idx
26921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26928 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26937 \begin_layout Standard
26938 An index entry is created if you use the menu
26940 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26942 \begin_inset space ~
26947 or the toolbar button
26954 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
26955 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
26956 by LyX as the index entry.
26959 \begin_layout Standard
26960 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
26962 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26963 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26965 \begin_inset space ~
26971 A light blue box labeled
26972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26980 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26983 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
26984 The index list box is not clickable like other LyX-boxes.
26987 \begin_layout Standard
26988 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
26989 For a detailed description of LaTeX's index mechanism, have a look at one
26991 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26993 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27000 \begin_layout Subsection
27001 Grouping Index Entries
27002 \begin_inset Index idx
27005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27014 \begin_layout Standard
27015 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27017 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27018 lists under the entry
27019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27027 First we create the entry
27028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27036 \begin_inset space ~
27040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27042 reference "sub:Lists"
27047 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27048 \begin_inset space ~
27052 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27054 reference "sec:Itemize"
27058 , we insert the command
27061 \begin_layout Standard
27067 \begin_layout Standard
27071 \begin_layout Standard
27077 \begin_layout Standard
27078 for the enumerated list in section
27079 \begin_inset space ~
27083 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27085 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27092 \begin_layout Standard
27093 The exclamation mark
27094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27101 marks the grouping levels.
27102 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27103 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27104 If we don't have an index entry for
27105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27109 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27112 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27115 \begin_layout Subsection
27117 \begin_inset Index idx
27120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27121 Index ! Page ranges
27129 \begin_layout Standard
27130 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27132 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27133 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27134 an index entry in section
27135 \begin_inset space ~
27139 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27141 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27148 \begin_layout Standard
27151 Paragraph environments|(
27154 \begin_layout Standard
27155 and another entry at the end of section
27156 \begin_inset space ~
27160 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27162 reference "sub:LyX-Code"
27169 \begin_layout Standard
27172 Paragraph environments|)
27175 \begin_layout Standard
27177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27200 respectively start and end the index range.
27201 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27202 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27203 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27204 An example is the index entry
27205 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27208 Document ! Settings
27209 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27215 \begin_layout Subsection
27217 \begin_inset Index idx
27220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27221 Index ! Cross referencing
27229 \begin_layout Standard
27230 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27231 We referred for example in the index entry
27232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27240 \begin_inset space ~
27244 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27246 reference "sub:Image-Formats"
27250 ) to the index entry
27251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27255 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27258 in the same section using the entry
27261 \begin_layout Standard
27264 GIF|see{Image formats}
27267 \begin_layout Standard
27268 where the braces have to be inserted as TeX Code.
27269 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27270 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27273 \begin_layout Subsection
27275 \begin_inset Index idx
27278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27279 Index ! Entry order
27287 \begin_layout Standard
27288 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27289 follow the rules for the index order.
27290 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but LaTeX
27294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27295 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27297 \begin_inset space ~
27301 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27303 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27312 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27313 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27338 \begin_inset Index idx
27341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27342 Dummy entries ! maïs
27348 \begin_inset Index idx
27351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27352 Dummy entries ! maître
27358 \begin_inset Index idx
27361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27362 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
27367 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
27368 maïs, maison, maître.
27369 To achieve this, we use the command
27372 \begin_layout Standard
27375 previous entry@current entry
27378 \begin_layout Standard
27379 In our case we want to have
27380 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27395 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
27398 \begin_layout Standard
27404 \begin_layout Standard
27405 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
27406 You can also use another word to tell LaTeX the entry order.
27407 See the next subsection for an example.
27410 \begin_layout Standard
27411 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27417 \begin_layout Standard
27418 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
27423 to generate the index (see sec.
27424 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27428 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27430 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27439 would for example print the index entry for the LaTeX-package aeguill in
27441 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27445 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27447 reference "sub:Document-Font"
27451 after the index entries of the other LaTeX-packages although all these
27452 index commands start with
27453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27465 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
27470 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
27473 \begin_layout Standard
27485 \begin_layout Standard
27497 \begin_layout Subsection
27499 \begin_inset Index idx
27502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27503 Index ! Entry layout
27511 \begin_layout Standard
27512 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
27513 \begin_inset Index idx
27516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27519 This is an italic dummy entry
27524 You can also format the page number using the character
27525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27532 followed by a LaTeX-command without a backslash.
27533 We can write for example
27536 \begin_layout Standard
27539 italic page number:|textit
27542 \begin_layout Standard
27543 to get the page number in italic.
27544 \begin_inset Index idx
27547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27548 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
27553 Normally all LaTeX-commands begin with a backslash, but in this special
27555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27571 \begin_inset space ~
27577 Have a look at section
27578 \begin_inset space ~
27582 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27584 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
27588 to learn more about the LaTeX-syntax.
27591 \begin_layout Standard
27592 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27600 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
27604 to generate the index, see sec.
27605 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27609 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27611 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27620 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
27625 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
27626 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27629 key "latexcompanion"
27641 \begin_layout Standard
27642 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
27644 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
27645 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
27646 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
27647 If so, put the following in the preamble
27650 \begin_layout Standard
27662 \begin_layout Standard
27666 \begin_layout Standard
27672 \begin_layout Standard
27673 in the index entry.
27674 \begin_inset Index idx
27677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27678 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
27683 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
27684 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
27685 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
27688 \begin_layout Standard
27689 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
27690 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
27691 a bold font for all index entries.
27692 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
27704 documentation for details,
27705 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27707 key "makeindex,xindy"
27714 \begin_layout Subsection
27716 \begin_inset Index idx
27719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27726 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27728 name "sub:Index-Program"
27735 \begin_layout Standard
27736 If the index generation program
27740 is installed, LyX uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
27744 , the program that is part of every LaTeX distribution, is used.
27748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27753 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
27754 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
27755 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
27756 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
27757 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
27767 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in LyX's preferences
27768 dialog, see section
27769 \begin_inset space ~
27773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27775 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
27780 The available options are listed and explained in
27781 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27783 key "makeindex,xindy"
27788 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
27792 \begin_layout Standard
27793 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
27794 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar \slash{}
27797 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27798 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27802 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
27803 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
27806 \begin_layout Subsection
27810 \begin_layout Standard
27811 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
27812 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
27813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27820 next to the standard index.
27821 LaTeX does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
27822 that add this feature.
27828 \begin_inset Index idx
27831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27832 LaTeX-packages ! splitidx
27837 package to generate multiple indexes.
27838 The package is included in all recent LaTeX distributions.
27842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27843 If yours does not ship it, consult the TeX-catalogue,
27844 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27851 Note that the package does not only consist of a LaTeX style, but it also
27852 includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
27853 Please consult the package's manual for details.
27861 \begin_layout Standard
27862 To set up LyX for the use of multiple indexes, go to
27864 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27865 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27868 and select the option
27870 Use multiple Indexes
27877 already contains the standard index
27878 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27886 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
27887 also appear as a heading) to the
27891 input field and press the
27896 The new index now also appears in the list.
27897 If you like, you can attribute an alternative LyX label color to the new
27901 \begin_layout Standard
27902 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
27905 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27912 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
27913 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
27914 are additional features:
27917 \begin_layout Itemize
27918 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
27919 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
27922 \begin_layout Itemize
27923 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
27924 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
27925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27932 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
27933 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
27934 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
27935 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
27938 \begin_layout Section
27939 Nomenclature/Glossary
27940 \begin_inset Index idx
27943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27950 \begin_inset Index idx
27953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27982 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27984 name "sec:Nomenclature"
27991 \begin_layout Standard
27992 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
27993 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
27994 called nomenclature or glossary.
27997 \begin_layout Standard
27998 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the LaTeX package
28004 \begin_inset Index idx
28007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28008 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
28014 You find it in the TeX-catalogue,
28015 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28021 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
28024 \begin_layout Standard
28025 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28026 and then use the menu
28028 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28034 \begin_inset space ~
28039 or the toolbar button
28042 arg "nomencl-insert"
28047 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28055 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28058 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28061 \begin_layout Standard
28062 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28063 The first is the term or
28067 that you wish to define.
28072 of the term or symbol.
28075 \begin_layout Standard
28076 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28084 You have to enter valid LaTeX-code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28092 \begin_layout Subsection
28093 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28094 \begin_inset Index idx
28097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28098 Nomenclature ! Layout
28106 \begin_layout Standard
28107 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28111 field as LaTeX-formulas.
28113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28117 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28125 \begin_inset Newline newline
28133 \begin_inset Newline newline
28139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28146 character starts/ends the formula.
28147 The LaTeX-command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning
28149 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28159 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28169 \begin_layout Standard
28170 (A short introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
28171 \begin_inset space ~
28175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28177 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
28184 \begin_layout Standard
28188 \begin_inset space ~
28193 dialog to format the description text; you have to use LaTeX-commands.
28194 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28195 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28199 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28206 in this document is:
28207 \begin_inset Newline newline
28212 dummy entry for the character
28217 \begin_inset Newline newline
28229 \begin_inset space ~
28239 font use the command
28268 \begin_layout Standard
28269 If the characters |
28270 \begin_inset space \space{}
28274 \begin_inset space \space{}
28278 \begin_inset space \space{}
28282 \begin_inset space \space{}
28286 \begin_inset space \space{}
28289 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28290 a quote character in front of them.
28291 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28292 LatexCommand nomenclature
28293 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28294 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
28301 \begin_layout Subsection
28302 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
28303 \begin_inset Index idx
28306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28307 Nomenclature ! Sort order
28315 \begin_layout Standard
28316 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the LaTeX-code of
28317 the symbol definition.
28318 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
28320 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
28323 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28324 LatexCommand nomenclature
28326 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
28333 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28337 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28338 LatexCommand nomenclature
28341 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
28346 They will be sorted by
28347 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28373 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28376 will be sorted before the
28380 since the character
28381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28388 is considered in sorting.
28391 \begin_layout Standard
28392 To control the sort order, you can edit the
28395 \begin_inset space ~
28400 field of the nomenclature dialog.
28401 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
28403 For the example given, you can insert
28407 in this field for the
28408 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28415 will be located before
28416 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28422 \begin_layout Standard
28423 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
28428 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28437 \begin_layout Subsection
28438 Nomenclature Options
28439 \begin_inset Index idx
28442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28443 Nomenclature ! Options
28451 \begin_layout Standard
28456 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
28457 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
28460 \begin_layout Description
28461 refeq Appends the phrase
28462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28477 to every nomenclature entry, where
28483 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
28486 \begin_layout Description
28487 refpage Appends the phrase
28488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28503 to every nomenclature entry, where
28509 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
28512 \begin_layout Description
28513 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
28516 \begin_layout Standard
28517 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
28518 class options list in the
28520 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28524 In this document the options
28531 \begin_layout Standard
28532 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28538 \begin_layout Standard
28539 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
28540 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
28545 field in the nomenclature dialog:
28548 \begin_layout Description
28558 \begin_layout Description
28561 nomrefpage Like the
28568 \begin_layout Description
28571 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
28580 \begin_layout Description
28584 \begin_inset space ~
28590 \begin_inset space ~
28595 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
28598 \begin_layout Standard
28600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28607 are automatically translated for some document languages.
28608 If not, add these lines to your LaTeX preamble:
28611 \begin_layout Standard
28619 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
28622 \begin_inset Newline newline
28629 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
28634 \begin_inset Newline newline
28638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28642 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28653 by their translation.
28656 \begin_layout Subsection
28657 Printing the Nomenclature
28658 \begin_inset Index idx
28661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28662 Nomenclature ! Printing
28670 \begin_layout Standard
28671 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
28673 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28674 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28690 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
28691 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
28692 You can choose between these settings:
28695 \begin_layout Description
28696 Default a space of 1
28697 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28703 \begin_layout Description
28705 \begin_inset space ~
28709 \begin_inset space ~
28712 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
28715 \begin_layout Description
28716 Custom custom space
28719 \begin_layout Standard
28720 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
28721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28729 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
28737 For example, in order to change the name to
28741 , add the following line to the preamble:
28744 \begin_layout Standard
28752 nomname}{List of Symbols}
28755 \begin_layout Subsection
28756 Nomenclature Program
28757 \begin_inset Index idx
28760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28761 Nomenclature ! Program
28767 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28769 name "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
28776 \begin_layout Standard
28777 LyX uses the program
28781 , that is part of every LaTeX distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
28782 LyX's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
28787 by adding options, see section
28788 \begin_inset space ~
28792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28794 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
28799 The available options are listed and explained in
28800 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28802 key "nomencl,makeindex"
28809 \begin_layout Section
28811 \begin_inset Index idx
28814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28821 \begin_inset Index idx
28824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28825 Document ! Branches
28831 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28833 name "sec:Branches"
28840 \begin_layout Standard
28841 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
28842 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
28843 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
28844 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
28847 \begin_layout Standard
28848 For these cases LyX allows you to put text into branches.
28849 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
28850 To create a branch, either select the menu
28852 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28853 Branch\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28856 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
28858 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28865 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
28866 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
28867 its background color inside LyX and whether the name of the branch should
28868 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
28869 (see below for an example).
28870 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
28871 to the name of the other) and to add
28872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28880 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28884 \begin_inset space ~
28887 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
28888 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
28891 \begin_layout Standard
28892 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
28893 These boxes are inserted via the menu
28895 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28898 where you can choose a branch.
28899 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
28903 \begin_layout Standard
28904 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
28905 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
28908 \begin_layout Standard
28909 \begin_inset Branch Question
28912 \begin_layout Standard
28913 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
28921 \begin_layout Standard
28922 \begin_inset Branch Answer
28925 \begin_layout Standard
28926 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
28934 \begin_layout Standard
28941 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28942 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28945 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
28946 Consider for example a file
28947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28951 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28954 which has the above branches.
28956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28963 is active, the PDF export file would be called
28964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28987 branch were inactive,
28988 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28992 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28996 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29003 branch was active, likewise
29004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29012 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29019 branch was active, and
29020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29023 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29027 if both branches were active.
29028 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29031 \begin_layout Standard
29032 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29038 \begin_layout Standard
29039 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29040 like inside equations, you can code special LaTeX definitions for each
29042 For example you can define for the question branch
29046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29047 For an introduction to the LaTeX-syntax, see section
29048 \begin_inset space ~
29052 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29054 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
29066 \begin_layout Standard
29076 \begin_layout Standard
29086 \begin_layout Standard
29087 and for the answer branch
29090 \begin_layout Standard
29100 \begin_layout Standard
29110 \begin_layout Standard
29111 \begin_inset Branch Question
29114 \begin_layout Standard
29118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29146 \begin_layout Standard
29147 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29150 \begin_layout Standard
29154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29182 \begin_layout Standard
29183 Now it is possible to use the
29187 question{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29194 answer{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29197 commands to obtain conditional output.
29198 Here is an example formula where only the
29205 \begin_inset Formula
29207 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29215 \begin_layout Standard
29216 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29224 \begin_layout Standard
29225 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29227 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29231 \begin_inset space \space{}
29234 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own LaTeX commands.).
29235 For this advanced usage, see the
29240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29243 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29250 \begin_layout Section
29252 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29254 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29259 \begin_inset Index idx
29262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29271 \begin_layout Standard
29274 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29275 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29278 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
29280 All these options are provided by the LaTeX-package
29285 \begin_inset Index idx
29288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29289 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
29294 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
29295 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
29296 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
29297 part of the document.
29301 \begin_layout Standard
29302 The header information in the dialog tab
29306 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
29307 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
29308 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
29309 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
29313 \begin_inset space ~
29317 \begin_inset space ~
29322 is set, LyX tries to extract the header information from your document
29323 title and author entries.
29327 \begin_inset space ~
29331 \begin_inset space ~
29335 \begin_inset space ~
29340 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
29343 \begin_layout Standard
29344 You can specify in the dialog tab
29348 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
29353 \begin_inset space ~
29357 \begin_inset space ~
29361 \begin_inset space ~
29366 option allows long links to be split;
29369 \begin_inset space ~
29373 \begin_inset space ~
29377 \begin_inset space ~
29385 \begin_inset space ~
29390 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
29393 \begin_inset space ~
29398 colors the different links.
29399 The default colors are:
29402 \begin_layout Labeling
29403 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29408 for hyperlinks and URLs
29411 \begin_layout Labeling
29412 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29420 \begin_layout Labeling
29421 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29429 \begin_layout Standard
29430 but you can change these in the field
29435 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
29438 \begin_layout Standard
29441 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
29444 \begin_layout Standard
29449 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
29450 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
29451 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
29454 \begin_layout Standard
29459 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
29460 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
29461 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
29471 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
29472 when opening the PDF.
29474 \begin_inset space ~
29477 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
29478 \begin_inset space ~
29481 1 will only display the sections.
29484 \begin_layout Standard
29485 PDF properties are also used in this document.
29486 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
29492 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
29493 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29502 \begin_layout Section
29503 TeX Code and the LaTeX Syntax
29504 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29506 name "sec:TeX-Code"
29513 \begin_layout Subsection
29515 \begin_inset Index idx
29518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29525 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29527 name "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
29534 \begin_layout Standard
29535 As LyX uses LaTeX in the background, it supports many LaTeX commands and
29536 constructs, but not all.
29537 LaTeX contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
29538 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
29539 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
29540 is a LaTeX-package for every problem, though LyX cannot support all packages
29541 and their commands.
29544 \begin_layout Standard
29545 But don't worry, you can use any LaTeX-command directly in LyX inside the
29547 A TeX Code box is created by the menu
29549 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29562 \begin_inset space ~
29567 or by the toolbar button
29580 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
29588 \begin_layout Standard
29589 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as TeX Code.
29590 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard LyX text.
29591 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
29592 using the LaTeX-command
29598 , you can write the command part
29604 in a TeX Code box before the word and the closing brace
29608 in a second TeX Code box behind the word.
29609 The word between the two TeX Code boxes is then the argument as it is in
29610 the following example:
29613 \begin_layout Standard
29614 \begin_inset Graphics
29615 filename clipart/ERT.png
29623 \begin_layout Standard
29627 \begin_layout Standard
29628 This is a line with a
29632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29655 \begin_layout Standard
29656 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29664 At the end of LaTeX-commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
29665 to let LaTeX know that the command is finished.
29673 \begin_layout Subsection
29674 A Short Introduction to the LaTeX Syntax
29675 \begin_inset Argument 1
29678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29685 \begin_inset Index idx
29688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29695 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29697 name "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
29704 \begin_layout Standard
29705 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
29706 about the LaTeX-commands that LyX uses in the background.
29707 Because LaTeX is based on commands, you can
29708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29716 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
29717 any time if you know the right commands.
29718 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
29719 is the end of the day.
29720 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
29721 all caption labels bold.
29722 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
29724 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
29728 \begin_layout Standard
29729 Now LaTeX comes into play.
29730 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a LaTeX-package.
29731 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the LaTeX package
29733 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29742 \begin_layout Standard
29743 As result you find that the package
29748 \begin_inset Index idx
29751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29752 LaTeX-packages ! caption
29758 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
29760 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29763 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
29770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29778 \begin_inset space ~
29786 \begin_layout Standard
29791 usepackage[options]{package name}
29794 \begin_layout Standard
29795 All LaTeX commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
29796 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
29797 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
29800 \begin_layout Standard
29801 In your case the package name is
29806 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
29811 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
29812 So you add the command
29815 \begin_layout Standard
29820 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
29823 \begin_layout Standard
29824 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
29828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29829 For more commands provided by the
29833 package, have a look at its documentation,
29834 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29848 \begin_layout Standard
29849 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
29851 For example if you use a
29855 class, you don't need the package
29859 , you can instead write
29862 \begin_layout Standard
29867 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
29872 \begin_layout Standard
29873 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
29874 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
29875 documentation of the document class you want to use.
29882 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
29885 \begin_layout Standard
29886 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
29887 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
29889 To insert a LaTeX-command in text, use the TeX Code box as described in
29890 the previous section.
29893 \begin_layout Standard
29894 If you want to learn more about LaTeX and its syntax, have a look at the
29896 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29898 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
29905 \begin_layout Standard
29906 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
29912 \begin_layout Standard
29916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29926 \begin_inset Note Note
29929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29930 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
29938 \begin_layout Left Header
29939 \begin_inset Argument 1
29942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29962 \begin_inset Note Note
29965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29966 defines the header line as described below
29974 \begin_layout Center Header
29975 \begin_inset Argument 1
29978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29987 \begin_layout Right Header
29988 \begin_inset Argument 1
29991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30012 \begin_layout Left Footer
30013 \begin_inset Argument 1
30016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30037 \begin_layout Center Footer
30038 \begin_inset Argument 1
30041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30052 \begin_inset Newline newline
30056 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30062 \begin_layout Right Footer
30063 \begin_inset Argument 1
30066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30088 \begin_layout Section
30089 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30090 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30092 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30097 \begin_inset Index idx
30100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30101 Document ! Header/Footer line
30107 \begin_inset Index idx
30110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30119 \begin_layout Standard
30120 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30124 \begin_inset space ~
30135 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30141 \begin_inset space ~
30147 As a second step add in the menu
30149 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30150 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30157 Custom Header/Footerlines
30158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30162 This module offers the following 6
30163 \begin_inset space ~
30169 \begin_layout Description
30171 \begin_inset space ~
30175 \begin_inset space ~
30179 \begin_inset space ~
30183 \begin_inset space ~
30187 \begin_inset space ~
30193 \begin_layout Description
30195 \begin_inset space ~
30199 \begin_inset space ~
30203 \begin_inset space ~
30207 \begin_inset space ~
30211 \begin_inset space ~
30217 \begin_layout Standard
30218 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30221 \begin_layout Standard
30222 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
30223 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30225 \begin_inset space ~
30229 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30231 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30235 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30238 \begin_layout Standard
30239 \begin_inset Float figure
30245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30248 \begin_inset Tabular
30249 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30250 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
30251 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30252 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30253 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30255 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30273 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30284 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30302 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30313 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
30316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30317 The normal text on the page goes here.
30318 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
30320 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
30321 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
30326 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30335 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30346 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30364 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30375 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
30387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30393 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30411 \begin_inset Caption Standard
30413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30414 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30416 name "fig:Page-layout"
30420 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
30433 \begin_layout Standard
30434 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30442 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
30446 \begin_inset space ~
30451 is set to “Default”.
30452 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
30461 \begin_layout Subsection
30465 \begin_layout Standard
30466 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
30467 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
30468 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
30469 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
30471 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
30472 Defining the footer line works similarly.
30475 \begin_layout Standard
30476 For the definition, you will need some LaTeX-commands that are inserted
30479 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30492 \begin_inset space ~
30500 \begin_layout Description
30503 thepage prints the current page number
30506 \begin_layout Description
30509 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
30512 \begin_layout Description
30515 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
30518 \begin_layout Description
30521 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
30522 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
30525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30529 \begin_inset Quotes prd
30532 because it usually goes in a left header.
30535 \begin_layout Description
30538 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
30539 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
30541 It is normally used in the right header.
30544 \begin_layout Subsection
30545 Default header/footer
30548 \begin_layout Standard
30549 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
30550 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
30551 footer has the page number.
30552 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
30553 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
30554 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
30557 \begin_inset space ~
30565 \begin_layout Subsection
30569 \begin_layout Standard
30570 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
30571 Some pages are different.
30572 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
30573 a new part or chapter in your book.
30574 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
30575 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
30576 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
30579 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30580 Header and footer decoration line
30583 \begin_layout Standard
30584 By default, you get a 0.4
30585 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30588 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
30589 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
30601 in the following way:
30604 \begin_layout Standard
30611 headrulewidth}{thickness}
30614 \begin_layout Standard
30615 where thickness is a size in standard units like
30624 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
30625 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30631 \begin_layout Standard
30632 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of LaTeX.
30633 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
30634 \begin_inset space ~
30638 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30647 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30648 Several header/footer lines
30651 \begin_layout Standard
30652 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
30653 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
30654 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
30656 To expand the height, redefine the LaTeX length
30670 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30671 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30684 \begin_inset space ~
30692 \begin_layout Standard
30699 headheight}{height}
30702 \begin_layout Standard
30703 where height is a size in standard units.
30704 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
30705 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
30706 Then open the LaTeX logfile with the menu
30708 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30725 \begin_inset space ~
30730 to see if you can find a warning about the package
30735 \begin_inset Index idx
30738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30739 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
30745 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
30746 for your header/footer.
30749 \begin_layout Subsection
30753 \begin_layout Standard
30754 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
30755 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
30756 This example consists of the following definition:
30759 \begin_layout Description
30761 \begin_inset space ~
30770 , empty optional argument
30773 \begin_layout Description
30775 \begin_inset space ~
30778 Header empty, empty optional argument
30781 \begin_layout Description
30783 \begin_inset space ~
30792 in the optional argument
30795 \begin_layout Description
30797 \begin_inset space ~
30806 in the optional argument
30809 \begin_layout Description
30811 \begin_inset space ~
30823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30827 \begin_inset Newline newline
30831 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30838 in the optional argument
30841 \begin_layout Description
30843 \begin_inset space ~
30852 , empty optional argument
30855 \begin_layout Description
30858 headrulewidth set to 2
30859 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30865 \begin_layout Standard
30866 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
30867 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
30873 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30882 \begin_layout Standard
30883 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
30889 \begin_layout Standard
30893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30897 pagestyle{headings}
30903 \begin_inset Note Note
30906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30907 switches back to page style with the default headings
30915 \begin_layout Section
30916 Previewing Snippets of your Document
30917 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30919 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
30924 \begin_inset Index idx
30927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30934 \begin_inset Index idx
30937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30946 \begin_layout Standard
30947 LyX allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the
30948 fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
30949 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
30952 \begin_layout Subsection
30956 \begin_layout Standard
30957 To get previews working, you need the LaTeX package
30962 \begin_inset Index idx
30965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30966 LaTeX-packages ! preview-latex
30971 (on some systems named simply
30976 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the TeX-catalogue,
30978 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30984 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
30985 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
30993 package; for LyX on Windows this program and also the LaTeX-package are
30994 automatically installed together with LyX.
30997 \begin_layout Subsection
31001 \begin_layout Standard
31002 If you would for example like to see in LyX your math formulas typeset by
31003 LaTeX, activate the option
31006 \begin_inset space ~
31013 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31019 \begin_inset space ~
31023 \begin_inset space ~
31026 feel\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31033 \begin_inset space ~
31046 \begin_inset space ~
31051 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31054 \begin_layout Standard
31055 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by LaTeX,
31059 \begin_inset space ~
31067 \begin_inset space ~
31075 \begin_layout Standard
31076 Previews are generated when you load a document into LyX and when you finish
31080 \begin_layout Standard
31081 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31089 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31090 generated by activating the option
31093 \begin_inset space ~
31099 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31107 \begin_layout Subsection
31108 Selected document parts
31111 \begin_layout Standard
31112 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31113 for example things that LyX cannot render like rotated parts or things
31114 that are not yet supported by LyX.
31115 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31117 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31121 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31122 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31123 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31126 \begin_layout Standard
31127 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the LaTeX command
31133 which is not yet supported by LyX.
31137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31144 is explained in section
31146 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31151 \begin_inset space ~
31161 Instead of the TeX Code boxes you want to see in LyX the final rotated
31162 boxes, for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding
31164 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31166 Here is the result:
31169 \begin_layout Standard
31170 \begin_inset Preview
31172 \begin_layout Standard
31177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31181 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31187 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31197 height_special "totalheight"
31200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31225 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31231 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31253 \begin_layout Standard
31254 Previewing works also for colors.
31255 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the LaTeX
31266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31273 is explained in section
31280 \begin_inset space ~
31293 \begin_layout Standard
31294 \begin_inset Preview
31296 \begin_layout Standard
31300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31319 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
31324 This is text within a colored, framed box.
31328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31343 \begin_layout Standard
31344 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
31350 \begin_layout Standard
31351 If LyX does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
31352 above and also make sure that TeX Code in the preview inset is valid and
31353 that you loaded the LaTeX packages in your document preamble that are required
31355 If LyX cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able
31356 to view your document due to LaTeX errors.
31357 So if you have to use some TeX Code and don't know if it is correct, the
31358 preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the
31362 \begin_layout Subsection
31366 \begin_layout Standard
31367 You can preview the LaTeX source of the whole document or parts of it.
31370 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31372 \begin_inset space ~
31377 and a window will be shown where you can see the LaTeX-source code.
31378 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
31380 You can also select document parts in LyX's main window, then only this
31381 selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
31382 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
31383 the source view window.
31388 , you can see the changes as you make them in LyX; but note that if you
31389 have several documents open, this will slow things down as LyX updates
31390 them all, not just the one which is open at the time.
31393 \begin_layout Section
31394 Advanced Find and Replace
31395 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31397 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
31402 \begin_inset Index idx
31405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31412 \begin_inset Index idx
31415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31424 \begin_layout Subsection
31428 \begin_layout Standard
31429 The advanced find and replace feature of LyX allows for searching of complex,
31430 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within LyX documents.
31431 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
31432 The key-features are:
31435 \begin_layout Itemize
31436 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
31437 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
31438 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
31442 \begin_layout Itemize
31443 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
31444 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
31445 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
31446 a section heading will only be found within section headings
31449 \begin_layout Itemize
31450 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
31451 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
31452 outside of mathematics environments
31455 \begin_layout Itemize
31456 Search may be widened to a specific
31461 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31465 \begin_inset space ~
31468 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
31469 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
31476 \begin_layout Itemize
31477 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
31478 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
31479 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31483 \begin_inset space ~
31486 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
31489 \begin_layout Subsection
31493 \begin_layout Standard
31494 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
31496 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31509 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
31512 ) or the toolbar button
31515 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
31521 Advanced Find and Replace
31526 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31530 \begin_layout Standard
31535 LyX mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
31539 \begin_inset space ~
31544 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
31547 arg "break-paragraph"
31551 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
31552 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
31556 arg "break-paragraph"
31559 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
31563 searches backwards.
31566 \begin_layout Standard
31570 \begin_inset space ~
31575 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
31584 \begin_inset space ~
31589 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
31592 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31593 Searching for mathematics
31596 \begin_layout Standard
31597 Mathematical formulas, such as
31598 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
31601 or something more complex like
31602 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
31605 , may be searched for by typing them in the
31610 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
31611 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
31612 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
31613 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
31619 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31623 \begin_layout Standard
31624 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
31625 This is done by switching to the
31629 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
31634 This way, entering in the
31641 \begin_layout Itemize
31642 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
31643 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
31646 \begin_layout Itemize
31647 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
31648 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
31651 \begin_layout Itemize
31652 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
31653 of it only within section headings.
31654 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
31655 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
31659 \begin_layout Itemize
31660 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
31661 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
31664 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31668 \begin_layout Standard
31669 The entries made in the
31673 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
31676 \begin_inset space ~
31682 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
31686 button or alternatively press
31689 arg "break-paragraph"
31696 while the cursor is in the
31699 \begin_inset space ~
31707 \begin_layout Standard
31708 You can replace with fully-featured formatted LyX entries.
31709 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
31713 \begin_layout Itemize
31714 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
31715 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
31716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31723 with its typewriter version
31724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31738 \begin_layout Itemize
31739 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
31741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31745 \begin_inset Formula $R$
31749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31757 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
31761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31764 (you may want to enable the
31767 \begin_inset space ~
31775 \begin_inset space ~
31780 options and disable the
31788 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
31789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31793 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31796 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
31797 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
31801 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\, j}$
31804 , or occurrences of
31805 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
31809 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
31815 \begin_layout Subsection
31819 \begin_layout Standard
31820 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
31824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31825 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
31827 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31829 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
31838 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
31844 This is done with the context menu
31846 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31847 Insert Regular Expression
31849 while the cursor is in the
31854 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
31855 expression matching rules
31859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31860 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed LyX
31862 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31866 \begin_inset space ~
31869 when matching LaTeX code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed
31870 to match expressions.
31875 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
31876 same text in the document.
31877 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
31878 Examples of using such a feature may be:
31881 \begin_layout Enumerate
31882 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
31887 editor the fraction
31888 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
31892 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
31895 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
31896 fractions with the given denominator.
31899 \begin_layout Enumerate
31900 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
31912 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
31917 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
31918 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
31919 Also, by inserting a
31920 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
31923 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
31924 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
31927 \begin_layout Standard
31928 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
31929 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
31930 \begin_inset Formula $()$
31933 , and referring back to them through
31934 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
31938 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
31942 For example, try searching with the regexp
31943 \begin_inset Newline newline
31946 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
31949 \begin_inset Newline newline
31952 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
31955 \begin_layout Standard
31956 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
31959 \begin_layout Standard
31960 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31968 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
31969 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
31970 sub-expressions is absolute.
31972 \begin_inset space ~
31976 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
31979 always refers to the first occurrence of
31980 \begin_inset Formula $()$
31983 in all entered regexps.
31991 \begin_layout Section
31993 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31995 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32000 \begin_inset Index idx
32003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32012 \begin_layout Standard
32013 LyX has a built-in spell checker.
32016 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32023 key or the toolbar button
32026 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32029 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32030 beginning of the currently selected text.
32031 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32032 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32033 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32034 scrolled so that it is visible.
32035 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32036 n, if any could be found.
32037 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32041 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32042 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32045 \begin_layout Standard
32046 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32049 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32053 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32054 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32055 LyX can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32056 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32059 \begin_inset space ~
32067 arg "dialog-show character"
32070 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32071 LyX automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32074 \begin_layout Standard
32075 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here:
32076 \begin_inset Newline newline
32080 \begin_inset Flex URL
32083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32085 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32091 \begin_inset Newline newline
32095 \begin_inset space ~
32098 files for each language.
32099 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32100 \begin_inset space ~
32103 files into LyX's installation subfolder
32112 \begin_inset Newline newline
32115 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32116 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32117 but in most cases these are
32133 is the language code.
32136 \begin_layout Subsection
32140 \begin_layout Standard
32143 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32144 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32146 \begin_inset space ~
32149 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32152 you can set the following things:
32155 \begin_layout Description
32157 \begin_inset space ~
32160 engine Select the library LyX should use for spell checking.
32161 Depending on your platform,
32175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32176 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32177 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32192 \begin_layout Description
32194 \begin_inset space ~
32197 language If this field is not empty, LyX will always use the given language
32198 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32201 \begin_layout Description
32203 \begin_inset space ~
32206 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32208 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32212 \begin_inset space \space{}
32216 This should normally not be needed.
32219 \begin_layout Description
32221 \begin_inset space ~
32225 \begin_inset space ~
32228 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32234 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32240 \begin_layout Description
32242 \begin_inset space ~
32245 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
32246 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
32247 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
32248 appear in a context menu.
32249 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
32253 \begin_layout Description
32255 \begin_inset space ~
32259 \begin_inset space ~
32263 \begin_inset space ~
32266 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
32270 \begin_layout Section
32272 \begin_inset Index idx
32275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32282 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32284 name "sec:Thesaurus"
32291 \begin_layout Standard
32292 LyX provides a multilingual thesaurus.
32293 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
32302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32303 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32305 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
32314 thesaurus library, which is included in LyX).
32315 Therefore, LyX is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
32316 which are available for many languages.
32319 \begin_layout Standard
32320 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
32324 \begin_layout Subsection
32325 Setting up the thesaurus
32328 \begin_layout Standard
32337 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
32341 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
32346 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
32348 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32352 \begin_inset space ~
32360 For instance, the US English files are named:
32363 \begin_layout Itemize
32367 \begin_layout Itemize
32371 \begin_layout Standard
32380 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
32381 and you just need to point LyX (in
32383 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32384 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32385 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32387 \begin_inset space ~
32392 ) to the path where they are installed.
32396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32397 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
32398 ies, typical locations are
32404 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
32408 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
32412 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
32415 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
32421 LibreOffice-<Version>
32428 On the Mac, the default location is
32430 /Users\SpecialChar \slash{}
32431 <user name>\SpecialChar \slash{}
32432 Library\SpecialChar \slash{}
32433 Application Support\SpecialChar \slash{}
32434 libreoffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
32435 <version>\SpecialChar \slash{}
32443 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
32444 during the LyX installation process, which will then be installed in the
32445 correct place right away.
32448 \begin_layout Standard
32449 If you want to install new\SpecialChar \slash{}
32450 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
32454 \begin_layout Itemize
32455 \begin_inset Flex URL
32458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32460 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
32468 \begin_layout Standard
32469 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
32470 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
32472 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32473 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32474 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32476 \begin_inset space ~
32482 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
32483 and point LyX there.
32486 \begin_layout Standard
32487 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
32489 LibreOffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
32492 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
32498 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
32501 If you do this, make sure that LyX is able to find the installed dictionaries,
32503 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32509 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32510 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32511 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32513 \begin_inset space ~
32518 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
32521 \begin_layout Subsection
32522 Using the thesaurus
32525 \begin_layout Standard
32526 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
32528 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32531 or the toolbar button
32534 arg "thesaurus-entry"
32537 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
32539 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
32541 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
32542 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
32543 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
32552 ), related terms (such as
32555 \begin_inset space ~
32564 ), compounds (such as
32567 \begin_inset space ~
32576 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
32585 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
32588 \begin_layout Standard
32589 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
32590 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
32594 \begin_layout Standard
32595 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
32596 the dictionary, such as the above
32600 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
32601 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32605 \begin_inset space \space{}
32608 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
32609 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
32610 For example, looking up the word form
32614 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
32619 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
32620 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32624 \begin_inset space \space{}
32635 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
32636 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
32637 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
32640 \begin_layout Section
32642 \begin_inset Index idx
32645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32652 \begin_inset Index idx
32655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32656 Document ! Change Tracking
32662 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32664 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
32671 \begin_layout Standard
32672 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
32673 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
32674 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
32675 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
32677 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32679 \begin_inset space ~
32682 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32684 \begin_inset space ~
32692 \begin_layout Standard
32693 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
32707 The color depends on the author that made the change.
32708 You can change the color in
32710 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32711 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32713 \begin_inset space ~
32717 \begin_inset space ~
32722 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
32728 \begin_inset Index idx
32731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32732 Color ! Change tracking
32737 The author and the date of the change are shown in LyX's status bar when
32738 the cursor is in changed text.
32739 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
32742 arg "changes-merge"
32748 \begin_layout Standard
32749 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in LyX:
32750 \begin_inset Index idx
32753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32762 \begin_layout Standard
32763 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32769 \begin_layout Standard
32770 \begin_inset Graphics
32771 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
32779 \begin_layout Standard
32780 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32786 \begin_layout Standard
32787 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
32790 \begin_layout Standard
32791 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32797 \begin_layout Standard
32798 \begin_inset Tabular
32799 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
32800 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
32801 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
32802 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
32803 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32812 arg "changes-track"
32820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32826 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32828 \begin_inset space ~
32831 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32833 \begin_inset space ~
32842 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32851 arg "changes-output"
32859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32865 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32867 \begin_inset space ~
32870 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32872 \begin_inset space ~
32876 \begin_inset space ~
32880 \begin_inset space ~
32889 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32910 Jumps to the next change
32916 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32925 arg "change-accept"
32933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32939 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32941 \begin_inset space ~
32944 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32946 \begin_inset space ~
32955 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32964 arg "change-reject"
32972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32978 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32980 \begin_inset space ~
32983 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32985 \begin_inset space ~
32994 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33003 arg "changes-merge"
33011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33017 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33019 \begin_inset space ~
33022 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33024 \begin_inset space ~
33033 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33042 arg "all-changes-accept"
33050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33056 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33058 \begin_inset space ~
33061 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33063 \begin_inset space ~
33067 \begin_inset space ~
33076 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33085 arg "all-changes-reject"
33093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33099 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33101 \begin_inset space ~
33104 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33106 \begin_inset space ~
33110 \begin_inset space ~
33119 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33142 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33143 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33156 \begin_inset space ~
33165 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33188 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33190 \begin_inset space ~
33206 \begin_layout Standard
33207 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33213 \begin_layout Standard
33214 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
33234 \begin_layout Standard
33235 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
33236 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
33237 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
33238 the next change after the current cursor position.
33239 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
33240 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
33241 step to the next change.
33242 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
33245 \begin_layout Standard
33246 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
33247 to describe a change.
33250 \begin_layout Standard
33251 To show the changes made in the output you need the LaTeX package
33256 \begin_inset Index idx
33259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33260 LaTeX-packages ! dvipost
33266 You will find it in the TeX Catalogue,
33267 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33273 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
33276 \begin_layout Section
33277 Comparison of Documents
33278 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33280 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
33285 \begin_inset Index idx
33288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33289 Comparison of documents
33297 \begin_layout Standard
33298 You can compare two different LyX files via the menu
33300 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33304 The comparison result is a LyX file with change tracking enabled showing
33306 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document LyX should
33307 take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
33311 \begin_inset space ~
33315 \begin_inset space ~
33319 \begin_inset space ~
33328 \begin_inset space ~
33332 \begin_inset space ~
33336 \begin_inset space ~
33340 \begin_inset space ~
33344 \begin_inset space ~
33348 \begin_inset space ~
33353 enables the change tracking option
33356 \begin_inset space ~
33360 \begin_inset space ~
33364 \begin_inset space ~
33369 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
33372 \begin_layout Section
33373 International Support
33374 \begin_inset Index idx
33377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33378 International support
33386 \begin_layout Standard
33387 This section describes how to use LyX with any language you want.
33388 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
33389 up LyX to use them:
33390 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33392 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
33399 \begin_layout Standard
33400 Besides languages, LyX also supports phonetic symbols, see section
33401 \begin_inset space ~
33405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33407 reference "sub:Special-Character"
33414 \begin_layout Subsection
33416 \begin_inset Index idx
33419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33426 \begin_inset Index idx
33429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33430 Document ! Settings
33436 \begin_inset Index idx
33439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33440 Document ! Language
33448 \begin_layout Standard
33451 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33452 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33455 dialog lets you set
33457 the language, the quote style and character encoding
33462 \begin_layout Standard
33467 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for LaTeX export.
33471 \begin_inset space ~
33476 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
33477 For details about the different encoding options see section
33478 \begin_inset space ~
33482 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33484 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
33491 \begin_layout Subsection
33492 Keyboard mapping configuration
33493 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33495 name "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
33502 \begin_layout Standard
33503 If you have for example a U.
33504 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33507 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
33508 can use an alternate keymap.
33509 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure LyX to
33510 use an Italian keymap.
33513 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33514 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33515 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33518 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
33519 \begin_inset space ~
33523 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33525 reference "sub:Keyboard-Map"
33530 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
33531 which one you want to use.
33534 \begin_layout Standard
33535 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
33536 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
33537 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
33538 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33541 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
33542 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
33543 one to support the characters you want.
33544 This and many other customizations are explained in the
33551 \begin_layout Chapter
33554 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33556 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
33563 \begin_layout Standard
33564 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
33565 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
33566 topic inside the user's guide.
33569 \begin_layout Section
33571 \begin_inset Index idx
33574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33583 \begin_layout Standard
33588 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
33591 \begin_layout Subsection
33595 \begin_layout Standard
33596 Creates a new document.
33599 \begin_layout Subsection
33603 \begin_layout Standard
33604 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
33605 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
33606 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
33609 \begin_layout Subsection
33613 \begin_layout Standard
33617 \begin_layout Subsection
33621 \begin_layout Standard
33622 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
33623 Click there on a file to open it.
33626 \begin_layout Subsection
33630 \begin_layout Standard
33631 Closes the current document.
33634 \begin_layout Subsection
33638 \begin_layout Standard
33639 Closes all opened documents.
33642 \begin_layout Subsection
33646 \begin_layout Standard
33647 Saves the actual document.
33650 \begin_layout Subsection
33654 \begin_layout Standard
33655 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
33658 \begin_layout Subsection
33662 \begin_layout Standard
33663 Saves all opened documents.
33666 \begin_layout Subsection
33670 \begin_layout Standard
33671 Reloads the actual document from disk.
33674 \begin_layout Subsection
33678 \begin_layout Standard
33679 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
33680 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
33681 It is described in the section
33683 Version Control in LyX
33687 Additional Features
33692 \begin_layout Subsection
33696 \begin_layout Standard
33697 Here you can import files from older LyX-versions, HTML-files, LaTeX-files,
33698 NoWeb-files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files
33700 The files will be imported as a new LyX-document.
33703 \begin_layout Standard
33704 When using the menu entry
33707 \begin_inset space ~
33712 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
33716 \begin_inset space ~
33720 \begin_inset space ~
33724 \begin_inset space ~
33729 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
33730 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
33733 \begin_layout Subsection
33735 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33744 \begin_layout Standard
33745 You can export your document to various file formats.
33746 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your LyX-file.
33747 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
33748 They depend on the programs found by LyX during its configuration.
33751 \begin_layout Standard
33752 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
33754 \begin_inset space ~
33758 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33760 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
33767 \begin_layout Description
33773 \begin_inset space ~
33780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33787 yX format of the special LyX
33788 \begin_inset space ~
33791 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
33792 \begin_inset Newline newline
33795 Since LyX 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into LyX.
33798 \begin_layout Description
33799 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
33805 \begin_layout Description
33807 \begin_inset space ~
33810 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
33816 \begin_layout Description
33817 DraftDVI LaTeX's native DVI-format.
33818 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
33819 files paths or file names in your document.
33820 LyX use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
33827 \begin_layout Description
33828 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
33829 in files paths or file names
33832 \begin_layout Description
33834 \begin_inset space ~
33841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33848 eX) DVI-format using the program
33852 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-TeX fonts;
33855 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33863 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
33871 \begin_layout Description
33873 \begin_inset space ~
33876 Dot text file with code in the programming language
33880 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
33885 \begin_layout Description
33886 HTML HTML-format (the HTML-converter is a third-party product and may not
33890 \begin_layout Description
33892 \begin_inset space ~
33896 \begin_inset space ~
33899 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
33903 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
33911 \begin_layout Description
33918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33926 \begin_inset space ~
33937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33950 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
33955 \begin_layout Description
33962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33970 \begin_inset space ~
33975 text file with the LaTeX source, additionally all images used in the document
33976 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
33980 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
33983 \begin_layout Description
33990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33998 \begin_inset space ~
34003 text file with the LaTeX source code, additionally all images used in the
34004 document will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable
34012 \begin_layout Description
34019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34027 \begin_inset space ~
34038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34051 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34056 \begin_layout Description
34058 \begin_inset space ~
34062 \begin_inset space ~
34071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34080 TeX) text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the syntax of the
34081 music notation software
34086 \begin_layout Description
34093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34103 \begin_inset space ~
34107 \begin_inset space ~
34110 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34111 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34112 to compile it (images, child documents, BibTeX files, etc.)
34115 \begin_layout Description
34122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34132 \begin_inset space ~
34135 z.y.x LyX-Document in a format readable by the LyX versions z.y.x (
34136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34151 represent the version number)
34154 \begin_layout Description
34161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34170 yXHTML HTML-format using LyX's internal XHTML engine
34173 \begin_layout Description
34174 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
34179 \begin_layout Description
34180 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
34182 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
34185 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
34189 \begin_layout Description
34193 \begin_inset space ~
34198 PDF-format using the program
34202 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34205 \begin_layout Description
34209 \begin_inset space ~
34216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34225 PDF-format using the program
34229 , produces PDF-files directly
34232 \begin_layout Description
34236 \begin_inset space ~
34241 PDF-format using the program
34245 , produces PDF-files directly
34248 \begin_layout Description
34252 \begin_inset space ~
34257 PDF-format using the program
34261 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34264 \begin_layout Description
34268 \begin_inset space ~
34275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34284 PDF-format using the program
34288 , produces PDF-files directly
34291 \begin_layout Description
34295 \begin_inset space ~
34303 \begin_layout Description
34307 \begin_inset space ~
34311 \begin_inset space ~
34316 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
34317 and then exported as text using the program
34322 \begin_layout Description
34327 PostScript format using the program
34332 \begin_layout Description
34333 Sweave text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the statistical
34334 programming language
34347 it is possible to use
34354 \begin_layout Standard
34355 If one of the menu entries
34362 \begin_inset space ~
34371 is missing, you need to update your LaTeX installation.
34372 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section
34373 \begin_inset space ~
34377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34379 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
34384 \begin_inset Index idx
34387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34388 Reconfiguration of LyX
34396 \begin_layout Subsection
34400 \begin_layout Standard
34401 With this menu entry you can print your document to a file in PostScript
34402 format or send it to a printer.
34403 The printer will also use the document in PostScript format.
34404 The conversion to PostScript is done in the background by LyX using the
34410 For more information have a look at section
34411 \begin_inset space ~
34415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34417 reference "sub:Printing-the-File"
34424 \begin_layout Subsection
34428 \begin_layout Standard
34429 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
34430 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to LyX's PATH
34431 prefix, see section
34432 \begin_inset space ~
34436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34438 reference "sec:Paths"
34443 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
34452 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
34453 The format can be changed in LyX's preferences as described in section
34454 \begin_inset space ~
34458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34460 reference "sub:Converters"
34467 \begin_layout Subsection
34468 New and Close Window
34471 \begin_layout Standard
34472 Opens or closes a new instance of LyX.
34475 \begin_layout Subsection
34479 \begin_layout Standard
34480 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
34483 \begin_layout Section
34485 \begin_inset Index idx
34488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34497 \begin_layout Subsection
34501 \begin_layout Standard
34502 Described in section
34503 \begin_inset space ~
34507 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34509 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
34516 \begin_layout Subsection
34517 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
34520 \begin_layout Standard
34521 Described in section
34522 \begin_inset space ~
34526 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34528 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
34535 \begin_layout Subsection
34539 \begin_layout Standard
34540 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
34541 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
34544 \begin_layout Subsection
34548 \begin_layout Standard
34549 Selects the whole document.
34552 \begin_layout Subsection
34553 Find & Replace (Quick)
34556 \begin_layout Standard
34557 Described in section
34558 \begin_inset space ~
34562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34564 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
34571 \begin_layout Subsection
34572 Find & Replace (Advanced)
34575 \begin_layout Standard
34576 Described in section
34577 \begin_inset space ~
34581 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34583 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34590 \begin_layout Subsection
34591 Move Paragraph Up/Down
34594 \begin_layout Standard
34595 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
34599 \begin_layout Subsection
34603 \begin_layout Standard
34604 Described in section
34605 \begin_inset space ~
34609 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34611 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
34618 \begin_layout Subsection
34620 \begin_inset Index idx
34623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34624 Paragraph ! Settings
34632 \begin_layout Standard
34633 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
34634 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
34638 \begin_layout Standard
34639 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
34640 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
34646 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34647 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34649 \begin_inset space ~
34657 \begin_layout Subsection
34661 \begin_layout Standard
34662 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
34663 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
34664 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
34668 \begin_layout Standard
34669 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
34671 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
34672 The properties of tables are described in section
34673 \begin_inset space ~
34677 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34679 reference "sec:Tables"
34683 , the properties of formulas in chapter
34684 \begin_inset space ~
34688 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34690 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
34697 \begin_layout Subsection
34698 Increase/Decrease List Depth
34701 \begin_layout Standard
34702 These menu entries are only active if the cursor is in an environment that
34704 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
34705 \begin_inset space ~
34709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34711 reference "sec:Nesting"
34716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34718 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
34725 \begin_layout Section
34727 \begin_inset Index idx
34730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34739 \begin_layout Standard
34740 At the bottom of the
34744 menu the opened documents are listed.
34747 \begin_layout Subsection
34748 Open/Close all Insets
34751 \begin_layout Standard
34752 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
34755 \begin_layout Subsection
34756 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
34759 \begin_layout Standard
34760 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
34763 \begin_layout Standard
34764 Math macros are described in the
34771 \begin_layout Subsection
34775 \begin_layout Standard
34776 Shows the outline window as described in sections
34777 \begin_inset space ~
34781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34783 reference "sec:Navigating"
34788 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34790 reference "sub:Table-of-Contents"
34797 \begin_layout Subsection
34801 \begin_layout Standard
34802 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
34804 \begin_inset space ~
34808 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34810 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
34817 \begin_layout Subsection
34821 \begin_layout Standard
34822 Opens a window showing console messages.
34823 This is useful for debugging LyX (i.
34824 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34827 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
34828 while LaTeX is processing the document.
34831 \begin_layout Subsection
34833 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34835 name "sub:Toolbars"
34840 \begin_inset Index idx
34843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34852 \begin_layout Standard
34853 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
34854 All toolbars and the
34857 \begin_inset space ~
34862 can be turned on and off.
34867 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
34879 \begin_inset space ~
34891 \begin_inset space ~
34896 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
34900 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
34907 \begin_layout Standard
34912 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
34916 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
34917 or when a certain feature is enabled.
34918 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
34919 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
34920 is inside a formula or table respectively.
34923 \begin_layout Standard
34924 LyX's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
34925 \begin_inset space ~
34929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34931 reference "sec:Toolbars"
34938 \begin_layout Subsection
34942 \begin_layout Standard
34946 \begin_inset space ~
34950 \begin_inset space ~
34954 \begin_inset space ~
34958 \begin_inset space ~
34962 \begin_inset space ~
34966 \begin_inset space ~
34971 will split LyX's main window vertically while
34974 \begin_inset space ~
34978 \begin_inset space ~
34982 \begin_inset space ~
34986 \begin_inset space ~
34990 \begin_inset space ~
34994 \begin_inset space ~
34999 will split it horizontally.
35000 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35001 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35002 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35003 three or more documents at the same time.
35004 To close a split view, use the menu
35007 \begin_inset space ~
35011 \begin_inset space ~
35019 \begin_layout Subsection
35023 \begin_layout Standard
35024 Closes a split view.
35027 \begin_layout Subsection
35031 \begin_layout Standard
35032 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35033 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35034 It furthermore displays LyX's main window fullscreen.
35035 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35036 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35039 \begin_layout Section
35041 \begin_inset Index idx
35044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35053 \begin_layout Subsection
35057 \begin_layout Standard
35058 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35059 \begin_inset space ~
35063 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35065 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35076 \begin_layout Subsection
35078 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35080 name "sub:Special-Character"
35087 \begin_layout Standard
35088 Here you can insert the following characters:
35091 \begin_layout Description
35096 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
35098 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
35099 the available characters depend on the LaTeX-packages you have installed.
35100 You can get a complete display by checking
35103 \begin_inset space ~
35109 \begin_inset Newline newline
35113 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35121 Not all characters will be visible in the
35125 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
35127 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35133 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
35137 ) can display every character.
35145 \begin_layout Description
35146 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar \ldots{}
35150 \begin_layout Description
35152 \begin_inset space ~
35156 \begin_inset space ~
35159 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
35160 \begin_inset space ~
35164 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35166 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
35173 \begin_layout Description
35175 \begin_inset space ~
35178 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
35181 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35182 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35188 \begin_layout Description
35190 \begin_inset space ~
35193 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
35196 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35197 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35203 \begin_layout Description
35205 \begin_inset space ~
35208 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar \nobreakdash-
35212 \begin_layout Description
35214 \begin_inset space ~
35217 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar \slash{}
35221 \begin_layout Description
35223 \begin_inset space ~
35226 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
35232 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35238 \begin_layout Description
35240 \begin_inset space ~
35243 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar \menuseparator
35247 \begin_layout Description
35249 \begin_inset space ~
35253 \begin_inset Index idx
35256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35263 \begin_inset Index idx
35266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35267 Language ! Phonetic symbols
35272 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
35273 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
35275 To use this feature you must have the LaTeX-package
35280 \begin_inset Index idx
35283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35284 LaTeX-packages ! tipa
35290 \begin_inset Newline newline
35293 More information about this feature can be found in the
35299 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35305 \begin_layout Subsection
35309 \begin_layout Standard
35310 Opens a submenu with the following options:
35313 \begin_layout Description
35314 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
35315 \begin_inset script superscript
35317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35326 \begin_layout Description
35327 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
35328 \begin_inset script subscript
35330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35339 \begin_layout Description
35341 \begin_inset space ~
35344 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
35345 \begin_inset space ~
35349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35351 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
35358 \begin_layout Description
35360 \begin_inset space ~
35363 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
35364 \begin_inset space ~
35368 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35370 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
35377 \begin_layout Description
35379 \begin_inset space ~
35382 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
35383 \begin_inset space ~
35387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35389 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
35396 \begin_layout Description
35398 \begin_inset space ~
35401 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
35403 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35407 \begin_inset space \space{}
35410 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
35411 An example from the LyX
35416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35419 To insert a fraction use the command
35424 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35428 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
35434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35437 The visible space is hereby the character before the
35444 \begin_layout Description
35446 \begin_inset space ~
35449 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
35450 \begin_inset space ~
35454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35456 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
35463 \begin_layout Description
35465 \begin_inset space ~
35468 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
35469 \begin_inset space ~
35473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35475 reference "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
35482 \begin_layout Description
35484 \begin_inset space ~
35487 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
35488 \begin_inset space ~
35492 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35494 reference "sub:Vertical-Space"
35501 \begin_layout Description
35502 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
35503 \begin_inset space ~
35507 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35509 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
35516 \begin_layout Description
35518 \begin_inset space ~
35521 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
35522 \begin_inset space ~
35526 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35528 reference "sub:Hyphenation"
35535 \begin_layout Description
35537 \begin_inset space ~
35540 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
35541 \begin_inset space ~
35545 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35547 reference "sub:Ligatures"
35554 \begin_layout Description
35556 \begin_inset space ~
35560 \begin_inset space ~
35563 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
35564 \begin_inset space ~
35568 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35570 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
35577 \begin_layout Description
35579 \begin_inset space ~
35582 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
35583 as described in section
35584 \begin_inset space ~
35588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35590 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
35597 \begin_layout Description
35599 \begin_inset space ~
35602 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
35603 \begin_inset space ~
35607 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35609 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
35616 \begin_layout Description
35618 \begin_inset space ~
35621 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
35622 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
35624 \begin_inset space ~
35628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35630 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
35637 \begin_layout Description
35639 \begin_inset space ~
35642 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
35643 \begin_inset space ~
35647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35649 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
35656 \begin_layout Description
35658 \begin_inset space ~
35662 \begin_inset space ~
35665 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
35666 \begin_inset space ~
35670 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35672 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
35679 \begin_layout Subsection
35683 \begin_layout Standard
35684 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
35688 \begin_inset space ~
35705 are described in section
35706 \begin_inset space ~
35710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35712 reference "sec:toc"
35721 is described in section
35722 \begin_inset space ~
35726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35728 reference "sec:Index"
35736 is described in section
35737 \begin_inset space ~
35741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35743 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
35749 BibTeX Bibliography
35751 is described in section
35752 \begin_inset space ~
35756 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35758 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
35765 \begin_layout Subsection
35769 \begin_layout Standard
35770 To insert floats, as described in section
35771 \begin_inset space ~
35775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35777 reference "sec:Floats"
35781 and in detail the chapter
35788 \begin_inset space ~
35796 \begin_layout Subsection
35800 \begin_layout Standard
35801 To insert notes, described in section
35802 \begin_inset space ~
35806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35808 reference "sec:Notes"
35815 \begin_layout Subsection
35819 \begin_layout Standard
35820 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
35822 Branches are described in section
35823 \begin_inset space ~
35827 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35829 reference "sec:Branches"
35836 \begin_layout Subsection
35840 \begin_layout Standard
35841 Inserts document class-specific insets.
35842 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
35844 An example is the document class
35845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35852 with three custom insets.
35855 Flex insets and InsetLayout
35859 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
35865 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
35868 \begin_layout Subsection
35870 \begin_inset Index idx
35873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35882 \begin_layout Standard
35883 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
35885 For more information see chapter
35887 External Document Parts
35890 \begin_inset space ~
35896 \begin_layout Subsection
35898 \begin_inset Index idx
35901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35910 \begin_layout Standard
35911 Inserts a box in a certain style.
35912 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
35919 \begin_inset space ~
35927 \begin_layout Subsection
35931 \begin_layout Standard
35936 dialog as described in section
35937 \begin_inset space ~
35941 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35943 reference "sec:Bibliography"
35950 \begin_layout Subsection
35954 \begin_layout Standard
35959 as described in section
35960 \begin_inset space ~
35964 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35966 reference "sec:Cross-References"
35973 \begin_layout Subsection
35977 \begin_layout Standard
35982 as described in section
35983 \begin_inset space ~
35987 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35989 reference "sec:Cross-References"
35996 \begin_layout Subsection
35998 \begin_inset Index idx
36001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36008 \begin_inset Index idx
36011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36012 Longtables ! Caption
36020 \begin_layout Standard
36021 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
36022 Floats are described in section
36023 \begin_inset space ~
36027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36029 reference "sec:Floats"
36033 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
36040 \begin_inset space ~
36048 \begin_layout Subsection
36052 \begin_layout Standard
36053 Inserts an index entry as described in section
36054 \begin_inset space ~
36058 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36060 reference "sec:Index"
36067 \begin_layout Subsection
36071 \begin_layout Standard
36072 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
36073 \begin_inset space ~
36077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36079 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36086 \begin_layout Subsection
36090 \begin_layout Standard
36091 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
36092 Tables are described in section
36093 \begin_inset space ~
36097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36099 reference "sec:Tables"
36103 and in detail in the chapter
36110 \begin_inset space ~
36118 \begin_layout Subsection
36122 \begin_layout Standard
36128 Graphics are described in section
36129 \begin_inset space ~
36133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36135 reference "sec:Graphics"
36142 \begin_layout Subsection
36146 \begin_layout Standard
36147 Inserts a URL as described in section
36148 \begin_inset space ~
36152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36154 reference "sub:URLs"
36161 \begin_layout Subsection
36165 \begin_layout Standard
36166 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
36167 \begin_inset space ~
36171 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36173 reference "sub:Hyperlinks"
36180 \begin_layout Subsection
36184 \begin_layout Standard
36185 Inserts a footnote as described in section
36186 \begin_inset space ~
36190 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36192 reference "sec:Footnotes"
36199 \begin_layout Subsection
36203 \begin_layout Standard
36204 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
36205 \begin_inset space ~
36209 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36211 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
36218 \begin_layout Subsection
36222 \begin_layout Standard
36223 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
36224 title or caption of a float.
36225 Inserts a short title as described in section
36226 \begin_inset space ~
36230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36232 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
36239 \begin_layout Subsection
36243 \begin_layout Standard
36244 Inserts a TeX Code box as described in section
36245 \begin_inset space ~
36249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36251 reference "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36258 \begin_layout Subsection
36260 \begin_inset Index idx
36263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36272 \begin_layout Standard
36273 Inserts a program listings box.
36274 Program listings are explained in the chapter
36276 Program Code Listings
36281 \begin_inset space ~
36289 \begin_layout Subsection
36293 \begin_layout Standard
36294 Inserts the actual date.
36295 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
36297 LyX offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
36305 \begin_inset space ~
36313 \begin_layout Subsection
36317 \begin_layout Standard
36318 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
36319 \begin_inset space ~
36323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36325 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36332 \begin_layout Section
36334 \begin_inset Index idx
36337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36346 \begin_layout Standard
36347 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
36348 \begin_inset space ~
36351 of the current document.
36352 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
36355 \begin_layout Subsection
36359 \begin_layout Standard
36360 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
36361 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
36362 to jump, for example, between section
36363 \begin_inset space ~
36367 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
36368 \begin_inset space ~
36371 2.5 and use the submenu
36374 \begin_inset space ~
36378 \begin_inset space ~
36385 \begin_inset space ~
36391 \begin_inset space ~
36395 \begin_inset space ~
36401 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
36405 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
36411 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
36414 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
36417 \begin_layout Standard
36418 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
36422 \begin_inset space ~
36427 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
36430 \begin_inset space ~
36435 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
36438 \begin_layout Subsection
36439 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
36442 \begin_layout Standard
36443 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
36447 \begin_layout Subsection
36451 \begin_layout Standard
36452 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
36453 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
36454 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
36458 \begin_inset space ~
36462 \begin_inset space ~
36470 \begin_layout Subsection
36474 \begin_layout Standard
36475 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
36478 The LyX Server\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36480 \begin_inset space ~
36488 \begin_inset space ~
36493 manual for a detailed description.
36496 \begin_layout Section
36498 \begin_inset Index idx
36501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36510 \begin_layout Subsection
36514 \begin_layout Standard
36515 Change Tracking is described in section
36516 \begin_inset space ~
36520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36522 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
36529 \begin_layout Subsection
36534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36544 \begin_layout Standard
36545 After running LaTeX by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be
36547 It shows the logfile of the LaTeX-program used.
36548 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
36549 to the clipboard or update the view.
36550 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for LaTeX-errors.
36553 \begin_layout Subsection
36554 Start Appendix Here
36557 \begin_layout Standard
36558 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
36559 as described in section
36560 \begin_inset space ~
36564 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36566 reference "sec:Appendices"
36573 \begin_layout Subsection
36575 \begin_inset space ~
36581 \begin_layout Standard
36582 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
36583 default output format for the document (menu
36585 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36586 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36587 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36589 \begin_inset space ~
36593 \begin_inset space ~
36599 \begin_inset space ~
36603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36605 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
36609 ) or in the LyX preferences (menu
36611 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36612 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36614 \begin_inset space ~
36617 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36619 \begin_inset space ~
36622 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36624 \begin_inset space ~
36628 \begin_inset space ~
36634 \begin_inset space ~
36638 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36640 reference "sec:File-Formats"
36644 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
36645 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
36647 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36648 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36650 \begin_inset space ~
36653 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36655 \begin_inset space ~
36658 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36662 \begin_inset space ~
36666 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36668 reference "sec:File-Formats"
36673 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
36674 The default output format is
36677 \begin_inset space ~
36685 \begin_layout Subsection
36686 View (Other Formats)
36689 \begin_layout Standard
36690 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
36691 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
36692 actual document with an external program.
36693 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
36694 the LaTeX programs that are found when LyX was configured.
36695 All possible formats are listed in section
36696 \begin_inset space ~
36700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36702 reference "sub:Export"
36707 You should at least see the menu entry
36712 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your LaTeX installation.
36713 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX (see section
36714 \begin_inset space ~
36718 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36720 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
36725 \begin_inset Index idx
36728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36729 Reconfiguration of LyX
36737 \begin_layout Standard
36738 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
36739 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
36741 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36742 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36744 \begin_inset space ~
36747 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36749 \begin_inset space ~
36752 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36756 \begin_inset space ~
36760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36762 reference "sec:File-Formats"
36767 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
36770 \begin_layout Subsection
36772 \begin_inset space ~
36778 \begin_layout Standard
36779 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
36780 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
36783 \begin_layout Subsection
36784 Update (Other Formats)
36787 \begin_layout Standard
36788 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
36789 your document without opening a new viewer window.
36792 \begin_layout Subsection
36793 View Master Document
36796 \begin_layout Standard
36797 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
36799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36813 \begin_inset space ~
36818 manual for more information on this topic).
36819 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
36820 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
36824 \begin_inset space ~
36828 \begin_inset space ~
36833 generates the output of the whole book, while
36837 will just output the chapter alone.
36840 \begin_layout Standard
36841 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
36842 in the document settings (menu
36844 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36845 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36846 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36848 \begin_inset space ~
36852 \begin_inset space ~
36858 \begin_inset space ~
36862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36864 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
36868 ) or in the preferences (menu
36870 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36871 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36873 \begin_inset space ~
36876 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36878 \begin_inset space ~
36881 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36883 \begin_inset space ~
36887 \begin_inset space ~
36893 \begin_inset space ~
36897 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36899 reference "sec:File-Formats"
36906 \begin_layout Subsection
36907 Update Master Document
36910 \begin_layout Standard
36911 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
36913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36917 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36927 \begin_inset space ~
36932 manual for more information on this topic).
36933 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
36934 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
36937 \begin_layout Standard
36938 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
36939 in the document settings (menu
36941 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36942 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36943 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36945 \begin_inset space ~
36949 \begin_inset space ~
36955 \begin_inset space ~
36959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36961 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
36965 ) or in the preferences (menu
36967 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36968 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36970 \begin_inset space ~
36973 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36975 \begin_inset space ~
36978 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36980 \begin_inset space ~
36984 \begin_inset space ~
36990 \begin_inset space ~
36994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36996 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37003 \begin_layout Subsection
37007 \begin_layout Standard
37008 Un/compresses the current document.
37011 \begin_layout Subsection
37015 \begin_layout Standard
37016 The document settings are described in appendix
37017 \begin_inset space ~
37021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37023 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
37030 \begin_layout Section
37032 \begin_inset Index idx
37035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37044 \begin_layout Subsection
37048 \begin_layout Standard
37049 Spell checking is explained in section
37050 \begin_inset space ~
37054 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37056 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
37063 \begin_layout Subsection
37067 \begin_layout Standard
37068 The thesaurus is described in section
37069 \begin_inset space ~
37073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37075 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
37082 \begin_layout Subsection
37084 \begin_inset Index idx
37087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37094 \begin_inset Index idx
37097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37106 \begin_layout Standard
37107 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
37108 the highlighted document part.
37111 \begin_layout Subsection
37116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37124 \begin_inset Index idx
37127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37136 \begin_layout Standard
37137 Generates with the help of the program
37141 a log of possible LaTeX-errors and displays it in a dialog.
37142 This feature is not available on Windows.
37145 \begin_layout Subsection
37150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37158 \begin_inset Index idx
37161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37170 \begin_layout Standard
37171 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your LaTeX-syst
37176 \begin_inset space ~
37181 to see the full filename paths.
37184 \begin_layout Subsection
37186 \begin_inset Index idx
37189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37198 \begin_layout Standard
37199 Opens a dialog to compare LyX files as described in section
37200 \begin_inset space ~
37204 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37206 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37213 \begin_layout Subsection
37215 \begin_inset Index idx
37218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37219 LyX ! Reconfigure|see
37223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37230 Reconfiguration of LyX
37234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37247 \begin_inset Index idx
37250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37251 Reconfiguration of LyX
37259 \begin_layout Standard
37260 Reconfigures LyX; that is, LyX looks for LaTeX-packages and programs it
37261 needs; see also section
37262 \begin_inset space ~
37266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37268 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37275 \begin_layout Subsection
37279 \begin_layout Standard
37284 dialog as described in detail in appendix
37285 \begin_inset space ~
37289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37291 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
37298 \begin_layout Section
37300 \begin_inset Index idx
37303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37312 \begin_layout Standard
37313 This menu lists the documentation files of LyX in the language of LyX's
37315 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
37319 \begin_layout Standard
37323 \begin_inset space ~
37328 shows a LyX-document with information about the LaTeX-packages and classes
37329 found by LyX (see also section
37330 \begin_inset space ~
37334 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37336 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
37343 \begin_layout Standard
37347 \begin_inset space ~
37354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37363 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the LyX version
37367 \begin_layout Section
37369 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37371 name "sec:Toolbars"
37378 \begin_layout Standard
37379 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
37380 \begin_inset space ~
37384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37386 reference "sub:Toolbars"
37393 \begin_layout Standard
37394 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
37395 This is described in the
37397 Additional Features
37402 \begin_layout Subsection
37404 \begin_inset Index idx
37407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37416 \begin_layout Standard
37417 \begin_inset Graphics
37418 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
37426 \begin_layout Standard
37427 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37433 \begin_layout Standard
37434 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
37439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37451 \begin_inset Note Note
37454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37455 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
37460 manual for more information.
37468 \begin_layout Standard
37469 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37475 \begin_layout Standard
37476 \begin_inset Tabular
37477 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
37478 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37479 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
37480 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
37482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37486 \begin_inset Graphics
37487 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
37497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37501 pull-down box for the environments
37514 \begin_layout Standard
37515 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
37521 \begin_layout Standard
37523 \begin_inset Tabular
37524 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
37525 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37526 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37527 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37528 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37551 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37558 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37581 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37588 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37611 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37618 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37627 arg "dialog-show print"
37635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37641 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37648 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37657 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
37665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37671 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37678 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37701 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37708 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37731 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37738 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37761 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37768 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37791 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37798 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37821 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37828 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37837 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
37845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37851 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37853 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37857 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37861 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37870 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37877 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
37885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37891 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37893 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37897 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37901 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37910 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37919 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
37927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37933 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37934 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37941 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37962 Emphasize text, function of the
37964 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37966 \begin_inset space ~
37969 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37978 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37999 Set text to noun style, function of the
38001 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38003 \begin_inset space ~
38006 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38015 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38024 arg "textstyle-apply"
38032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38036 Format text using the current settings in the
38038 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38040 \begin_inset space ~
38043 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38052 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38075 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38076 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38078 \begin_inset space ~
38087 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38096 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
38104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38110 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38117 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38124 arg "tabular-insert"
38132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38138 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38145 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38154 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
38162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38166 Toggle outline window on/off,
38168 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38175 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38184 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
38192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38196 Toggle math toolbar on/off
38202 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38211 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
38219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38223 Toggle table toolbar on/off
38236 \begin_layout Subsection
38238 \begin_inset Index idx
38241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38250 \begin_layout Standard
38251 \begin_inset Graphics
38252 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
38260 \begin_layout Standard
38261 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38267 \begin_layout Standard
38268 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38272 \begin_layout Standard
38273 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38279 \begin_layout Standard
38280 \begin_inset Tabular
38281 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
38282 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38283 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38284 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38285 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38312 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38321 arg "layout Enumerate"
38329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38339 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38348 arg "layout Itemize"
38356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38366 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38393 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38402 arg "layout Description"
38410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38420 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38429 arg "depth-increment"
38437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38443 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38445 \begin_inset space ~
38449 \begin_inset space ~
38458 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38467 arg "depth-decrement"
38475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38481 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38483 \begin_inset space ~
38487 \begin_inset space ~
38496 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38505 arg "float-insert figure"
38513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38519 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38520 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38527 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38536 arg "float-insert table"
38544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38550 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38551 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38558 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38581 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38588 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38597 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
38605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38611 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38618 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38627 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
38635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38641 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38648 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38671 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38673 \begin_inset space ~
38682 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38691 arg "nomencl-insert"
38699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38705 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38707 \begin_inset space ~
38716 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38725 arg "footnote-insert"
38733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38739 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38746 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38755 arg "marginalnote-insert"
38763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38769 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38771 \begin_inset space ~
38780 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38803 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38804 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38817 \begin_inset space ~
38826 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38835 arg "box-insert Frameless"
38843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38849 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38856 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38879 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38886 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38909 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38926 \begin_inset space ~
38935 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38944 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
38952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38958 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38959 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38966 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38975 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
38983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38989 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38990 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38992 \begin_inset space ~
39001 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39010 arg "dialog-show character"
39018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39024 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39026 \begin_inset space ~
39029 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39036 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39045 arg "layout-paragraph"
39053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39059 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39061 \begin_inset space ~
39070 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39079 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39093 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39107 \begin_layout Subsection
39108 View/Update Toolbar
39109 \begin_inset Index idx
39112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39113 Toolbar ! View / Update
39121 \begin_layout Standard
39122 \begin_inset Graphics
39123 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
39130 \begin_layout Standard
39131 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39137 \begin_layout Standard
39138 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39142 \begin_layout Standard
39143 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39149 \begin_layout Standard
39150 \begin_inset Tabular
39151 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
39152 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39153 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39154 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39155 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39178 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39185 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39194 arg "buffer-update"
39202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39208 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39215 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39224 arg "master-buffer-view"
39232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39238 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39240 \begin_inset space ~
39249 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39258 arg "master-buffer-update"
39266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39272 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39274 \begin_inset space ~
39278 \begin_inset space ~
39287 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39296 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
39304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39310 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39311 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39312 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39313 Synchronize with Output
39319 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39324 \begin_inset Graphics
39325 filename ../images/view-others.png
39327 groupId toolbarbuttons
39338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39344 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39345 View (Other Formats)
39351 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39356 \begin_inset Graphics
39357 filename ../images/update-others.png
39359 groupId toolbarbuttons
39368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39374 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39375 Update (Other Formats)
39388 \begin_layout Standard
39389 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
39393 \begin_layout Subsection
39397 \begin_layout Standard
39398 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
39399 \begin_inset space ~
39403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39405 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
39409 , the table toolbar
39410 \begin_inset Index idx
39413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39422 \begin_inset space ~
39427 manual and the math macro toolbar
39428 \begin_inset Index idx
39431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39444 \begin_layout Chapter
39445 The Document Settings
39446 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39448 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
39453 \begin_inset Index idx
39456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39457 Document ! Settings
39465 \begin_layout Standard
39469 \begin_inset space ~
39474 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
39475 is called with the menu
39477 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39481 You can save your document settings as default with the
39483 Save as Document Defaults
39485 button in any dialog.
39486 This will create a template named
39490 which is automatically loaded by LyX when you create a new document without
39494 \begin_layout Standard
39499 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
39500 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
39503 \begin_layout Standard
39504 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
39505 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
39506 to find the one you are looking for.
39507 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
39508 the submenus of the dialog.
39510 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39514 \begin_inset space \space{}
39518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39525 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
39526 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
39527 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
39530 \begin_layout Section
39534 \begin_layout Standard
39535 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
39537 Document classes are described in section
39538 \begin_inset space ~
39542 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39544 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
39552 \begin_layout Standard
39556 \begin_inset space ~
39561 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in LyX's
39565 folder and thus not recognized by LyX as a layout for a document class.
39566 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
39568 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
39577 \begin_layout Standard
39578 Some classes use special class options by default.
39579 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
39583 and you can decide to use them or not.
39584 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
39585 recommended you leave them untouched.
39590 is used for LaTeX's graphics, color and page layout packages.
39595 , the default driver for the LaTeX-packages is used.
39596 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
39601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39602 When you want to use one of the following drivers
39603 \begin_inset Newline newline
39608 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
39611 \begin_inset Newline newline
39614 you first have to activate them in your LaTeX distribution, see section
39620 \begin_inset CommandInset href
39622 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
39634 \begin_layout Standard
39639 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
39640 The master document will be used by LyX in the background if the child
39641 document is opened without its master.
39642 This way child documents are always compilable.
39643 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
39650 \begin_inset space ~
39658 \begin_layout Standard
39659 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the LaTeX-package
39669 \begin_inset Index idx
39672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39673 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
39679 \begin_inset Index idx
39682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39683 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
39688 for cross-references, see section
39689 \begin_inset space ~
39693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39695 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39702 \begin_layout Section
39706 \begin_layout Standard
39707 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
39708 Please refer to the section
39711 \begin_inset space ~
39719 \begin_inset space ~
39724 manual for details.
39727 \begin_layout Section
39731 \begin_layout Standard
39732 Modules are explained in section
39733 \begin_inset space ~
39737 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39739 reference "sub:Modules"
39746 \begin_layout Section
39750 \begin_layout Standard
39752 \begin_inset space ~
39756 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39758 reference "sub:Local-Layout"
39765 \begin_layout Section
39769 \begin_layout Standard
39770 The document font settings are described in section
39771 \begin_inset space ~
39775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39777 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
39784 \begin_layout Section
39788 \begin_layout Standard
39789 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
39801 \begin_inset space ~
39806 and whether it should be a
39809 \begin_inset space ~
39814 can also be specified here.
39817 \begin_layout Standard
39818 Note that LyX will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on
39820 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
39822 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
39825 \begin_layout Section
39829 \begin_layout Standard
39830 This dialog is described in sections
39831 \begin_inset space ~
39835 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39837 reference "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
39842 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39844 reference "sub:Document-Layout"
39851 \begin_layout Section
39855 \begin_layout Standard
39856 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
39857 \begin_inset space ~
39861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39863 reference "sub:Margins"
39870 \begin_layout Section
39872 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39874 name "sec:Language-encodings"
39879 \begin_inset Index idx
39882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39883 Language ! Encoding
39891 \begin_layout Standard
39892 The document language and quote styles are set here.
39893 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to LaTeX (the
39894 LyX file is always encoded in utf8).
39895 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
39896 be exported as LaTeX-commands (this can fail if a LaTeX-command is not
39897 known for a particular character).
39901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39902 The known commands are defined in a text file (
39907 You can add commands for unknown symbols to that file yourself, see the
39912 manual for details.
39920 \begin_layout Standard
39921 If you use the option
39925 , LyX determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
39926 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
39927 than one encoding in the LaTeX file.
39928 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
39929 exactly one encoding.
39930 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
39933 \begin_layout Standard
39934 LyX also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
39935 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
39936 If you want to use this (and your LaTeX installation supports Unicode),
39937 choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
39938 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard LaTeX is quite incomplete,
39939 so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
39944 (when LyX uses its list of known LaTeX-commands), but does not work with
39945 a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known LaTeX-commands is not used,
39946 because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
39947 The situation is much better with XeTeX and LuaTeX, two new alternative
39948 engines to standard LaTeX.
39949 Both engines support Unicode natively.
39950 LyX now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
39953 \begin_inset space ~
39960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39972 \begin_inset space ~
39979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39991 \begin_inset space ~
39997 \begin_inset space ~
40001 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40003 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
40008 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40012 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40015 \begin_layout Standard
40019 \begin_inset space ~
40024 determines the LaTeX-package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40034 The possible settings are:
40037 \begin_layout Description
40038 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40040 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40041 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40045 \begin_inset space ~
40049 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40051 reference "sub:Prefs-Language"
40058 \begin_layout Description
40059 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
40060 format you will use.
40061 In many cases this will be
40066 \begin_inset Index idx
40069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40070 LaTeX-packages ! babel
40076 If the newer package
40081 \begin_inset Index idx
40084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40085 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
40090 is more appropriate (is the case when using XeTeX and/or non-TeX fonts),
40091 this package will be used instead of
40098 \begin_layout Description
40100 \begin_inset space ~
40111 would be more appropriate.
40114 \begin_layout Description
40115 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
40116 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
40120 (for German texts), type in
40123 \begin_inset Newline newline
40128 usepackage{ngerman}
40131 \begin_layout Description
40132 None will not use a language package.
40133 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
40136 \begin_layout Standard
40137 Here is a list with the important encodings:
40140 \begin_layout Description
40142 \begin_inset space ~
40146 \begin_inset space ~
40150 \begin_inset space ~
40157 , but the LaTeX-package
40162 \begin_inset Index idx
40165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40166 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
40172 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
40173 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
40174 languages in TeX code.
40177 \begin_layout Description
40178 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
40179 LyX converts all other characters into LaTeX commands, which may result
40180 in a big file when lots of LaTeX-commands are needed.
40183 \begin_layout Description
40185 \begin_inset space ~
40189 \begin_inset space ~
40192 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
40195 \begin_layout Description
40197 \begin_inset space ~
40201 \begin_inset space ~
40204 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
40207 \begin_layout Description
40209 \begin_inset space ~
40212 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
40215 \begin_layout Description
40217 \begin_inset space ~
40221 \begin_inset space ~
40224 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
40225 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
40228 \begin_layout Description
40230 \begin_inset space ~
40234 \begin_inset space ~
40237 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
40241 \begin_layout Description
40243 \begin_inset space ~
40247 \begin_inset space ~
40250 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
40251 ISO-8859-13 encoding
40254 \begin_layout Description
40256 \begin_inset space ~
40260 \begin_inset space ~
40264 \begin_inset space ~
40267 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
40268 \begin_inset space ~
40274 \begin_layout Description
40276 \begin_inset space ~
40280 \begin_inset space ~
40284 \begin_inset space ~
40287 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
40288 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
40291 \begin_layout Description
40293 \begin_inset space ~
40297 \begin_inset space ~
40300 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
40301 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
40302 is not available for LaTeX you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40303 \begin_inset space ~
40307 \begin_inset space ~
40313 \begin_layout Description
40315 \begin_inset space ~
40319 \begin_inset space ~
40322 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
40323 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
40324 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for LaTeX
40325 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40326 \begin_inset space ~
40330 \begin_inset space ~
40336 \begin_layout Description
40338 \begin_inset space ~
40342 \begin_inset space ~
40345 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
40348 \begin_layout Description
40350 \begin_inset space ~
40354 \begin_inset space ~
40357 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
40360 \begin_layout Description
40362 \begin_inset space ~
40366 \begin_inset space ~
40369 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
40372 \begin_layout Description
40374 \begin_inset space ~
40377 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
40380 \begin_layout Description
40382 \begin_inset space ~
40385 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
40388 \begin_layout Description
40390 \begin_inset space ~
40394 \begin_inset space ~
40397 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
40400 \begin_layout Description
40402 \begin_inset space ~
40406 \begin_inset space ~
40412 \begin_layout Description
40414 \begin_inset space ~
40418 \begin_inset space ~
40421 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
40424 \begin_layout Description
40426 \begin_inset space ~
40430 \begin_inset space ~
40436 \begin_layout Description
40438 \begin_inset space ~
40442 \begin_inset space ~
40445 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40450 \begin_inset Index idx
40453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40454 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
40459 , when using this, set the document language to
40464 \begin_layout Description
40466 \begin_inset space ~
40470 \begin_inset space ~
40473 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40477 , when using this, set the document language to
40480 \begin_inset space ~
40486 \begin_layout Description
40488 \begin_inset space ~
40492 \begin_inset space ~
40495 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40500 \begin_inset Index idx
40503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40504 LaTeX-packages ! japanese
40509 , when using this, set the document language to
40514 \begin_layout Description
40516 \begin_inset space ~
40520 \begin_inset space ~
40523 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40527 , when using this, set the document language to
40532 \begin_layout Description
40534 \begin_inset space ~
40538 \begin_inset space ~
40541 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40545 , when using this, set the document language to
40550 \begin_layout Description
40552 \begin_inset space ~
40555 (EUC-KR) for Korean
40558 \begin_layout Description
40560 \begin_inset space ~
40564 \begin_inset space ~
40568 \begin_inset space ~
40571 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
40574 \begin_layout Description
40576 \begin_inset space ~
40580 \begin_inset space ~
40584 \begin_inset space ~
40587 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
40588 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
40589 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
40592 \begin_layout Description
40594 \begin_inset space ~
40598 \begin_inset space ~
40604 \begin_layout Description
40606 \begin_inset space ~
40610 \begin_inset space ~
40613 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
40614 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
40617 \begin_layout Description
40619 \begin_inset space ~
40623 \begin_inset space ~
40626 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the LaTeX-package
40631 \begin_inset Index idx
40634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40635 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
40640 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
40643 \begin_layout Description
40645 \begin_inset space ~
40649 \begin_inset space ~
40652 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
40660 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the LaTeX-package
40665 LyX automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview XeTeX
40667 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
40670 \begin_layout Description
40672 \begin_inset space ~
40676 \begin_inset space ~
40679 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
40684 \begin_inset Index idx
40687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40688 LaTeX-packages ! ucs
40693 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
40696 \begin_layout Description
40698 \begin_inset space ~
40701 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
40706 \begin_inset Index idx
40709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40710 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
40716 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
40720 \begin_layout Description
40722 \begin_inset space ~
40726 \begin_inset space ~
40730 \begin_inset space ~
40733 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
40734 \begin_inset space ~
40740 \begin_layout Description
40742 \begin_inset space ~
40746 \begin_inset space ~
40750 \begin_inset space ~
40753 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
40754 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
40755 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
40759 \begin_layout Description
40761 \begin_inset space ~
40765 \begin_inset space ~
40769 \begin_inset space ~
40772 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
40773 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
40776 \begin_layout Section
40778 \begin_inset Index idx
40781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40788 \begin_inset Index idx
40791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40798 \begin_inset Index idx
40801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40802 Color ! Shaded boxes
40808 \begin_inset Index idx
40811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40812 Color ! Greyed-out notes
40820 \begin_layout Standard
40821 Here you can alter the font color for the
40825 (default: black), for
40828 \begin_inset space ~
40833 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
40837 (default: white) and for
40840 \begin_inset space ~
40850 sets the color back to the default.
40853 \begin_layout Standard
40854 Clicking any button showing
40862 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
40863 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
40864 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
40865 later more quickly.
40868 \begin_layout Standard
40869 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40873 The colors are not shown within LyX, only in the output.
40875 \begin_inset space ~
40878 out note appears blue in the output.)
40886 \begin_layout Standard
40887 Note, if you change the
40890 \begin_inset space ~
40895 font color and use the option
40898 \begin_inset space ~
40903 in the document settings under
40906 \begin_inset space ~
40911 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
40912 \begin_inset space ~
40916 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40918 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
40925 \begin_layout Standard
40926 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
40932 \begin_layout Standard
40936 \begin_inset space ~
40945 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
40947 \begin_inset space ~
40950 Code after a forced page break:
40953 \begin_layout Itemize
40954 For the page color:
40955 \begin_inset Newline newline
40962 pagecolor{color name}
40965 \begin_layout Itemize
40966 For the text color:
40967 \begin_inset Newline newline
40977 \begin_layout Standard
40978 You are restricted to one of
41014 unless you have defined your own color (see the
41021 \begin_inset space ~
41027 \begin_inset Newline newline
41030 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41031 names to refer to them:
41034 \begin_layout Itemize
41040 \begin_inset Newline newline
41045 page_backgroundcolor
41048 \begin_layout Itemize
41052 \begin_inset space ~
41058 \begin_inset Newline newline
41066 \begin_layout Itemize
41070 \begin_inset space ~
41076 \begin_inset Newline newline
41084 \begin_layout Itemize
41088 \begin_inset space ~
41094 \begin_inset Newline newline
41102 \begin_layout Standard
41103 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section Colored
41104 \begin_inset space ~
41107 Cells of the Embedded
41108 \begin_inset space ~
41114 \begin_layout Section
41118 \begin_layout Standard
41119 Here you can adjust the
41123 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
41127 as described in section
41128 \begin_inset space ~
41132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41134 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
41141 \begin_layout Section
41145 \begin_layout Standard
41146 Here you can specify if a citation style using the LaTeX packages
41151 \begin_inset Index idx
41154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41155 LaTeX-packages ! natbib
41165 \begin_inset Index idx
41168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41169 LaTeX-packages ! jurabib
41177 Sectioned bibliography
41179 using the LaTeX package
41184 \begin_inset Index idx
41187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41188 LaTeX-packages ! bibtopic
41193 and you can select a
41197 for the generation of the bibliography.
41198 For a further description see section
41199 \begin_inset space ~
41203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41205 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41212 \begin_layout Section
41216 \begin_layout Standard
41217 Here you can define the
41221 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
41223 \begin_inset space ~
41227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41229 reference "sec:Index"
41236 \begin_layout Section
41240 \begin_layout Standard
41241 The PDF properties are explained in section
41242 \begin_inset space ~
41246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41248 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41255 \begin_layout Section
41259 \begin_layout Standard
41260 These options will force LyX to use the LaTeX-packages
41265 \begin_inset Index idx
41268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41269 LaTeX-packages ! amsmath
41279 \begin_inset Index idx
41282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41283 LaTeX-packages ! esint
41293 \begin_inset Index idx
41296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41297 LaTeX-packages ! mathdots
41307 \begin_inset Index idx
41310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41311 LaTeX-packages ! mhchem
41316 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
41319 \begin_layout Description
41320 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get LaTeX-errors in formulas,
41321 ensure that you have enabled
41324 \begin_inset space ~
41332 \begin_layout Description
41333 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
41336 \begin_inset space ~
41348 \begin_layout Description
41349 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
41360 \begin_layout Description
41361 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
41363 Chemical Symbols and Equations
41372 \begin_layout Section
41376 \begin_layout Standard
41377 The float placement options are described in the section
41380 \begin_inset space ~
41388 \begin_inset space ~
41396 \begin_layout Section
41400 \begin_layout Standard
41401 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
41403 Program Code Listings
41408 \begin_inset space ~
41416 \begin_layout Section
41420 \begin_layout Standard
41421 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
41429 set to be used and set the
41434 The itemize environment is described in section
41435 \begin_inset space ~
41439 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41441 reference "sec:Itemize"
41448 \begin_layout Standard
41449 You can furthermore specify a
41452 \begin_inset space ~
41457 by inserting in this field the LaTeX command of the desired character.
41458 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
41465 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
41467 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41471 \begin_inset space \space{}
41475 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
41485 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
41486 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
41489 \begin_layout Standard
41490 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41498 Some characters require to load special LaTeX-packages in the preamble
41501 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41502 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41504 \begin_inset space ~
41510 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
41514 usepackage{textcomp}
41517 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
41521 usepackage{amssymb}
41531 \begin_layout Section
41535 \begin_layout Standard
41536 Branches are described in section
41537 \begin_inset space ~
41541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41543 reference "sec:Branches"
41550 \begin_layout Section
41552 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41554 name "sec:Doc-Output"
41561 \begin_layout Standard
41562 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
41565 \begin_layout Description
41567 \begin_inset space ~
41571 \begin_inset space ~
41574 Format: The format that is used when you enter
41575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41594 View Master Document
41595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41602 Update Master Document
41603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41610 menu or the toolbar.
41611 The default is set in
41613 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41614 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41616 \begin_inset space ~
41619 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41623 \begin_inset space ~
41627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41629 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41636 \begin_layout Description
41638 \begin_inset space ~
41642 \begin_inset space ~
41645 Output settings for the menu
41647 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41649 \begin_inset space ~
41655 For a detailed description see section
41657 Reverse DVI/PDF search
41662 \begin_inset space ~
41670 \begin_layout Description
41672 \begin_inset space ~
41676 \begin_inset space ~
41679 Options offers settings for the export format
41685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41698 \begin_inset space ~
41703 will assure that the output follows exactly version
41704 \begin_inset space ~
41707 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
41711 \begin_inset space ~
41716 settings are described in detail in section
41718 Math Output in XHTML
41723 \begin_inset space ~
41732 \begin_inset space ~
41736 \begin_inset space ~
41741 is used for the size of equations in the output.
41744 \begin_layout Section
41749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41759 \begin_layout Standard
41760 In this text field you can enter commands to load special LaTeX-packages
41761 or to define LaTeX-commands.
41762 The preamble is a thing for LaTeX-experts.
41763 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
41767 \begin_layout Standard
41768 An introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
41769 \begin_inset space ~
41773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41775 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
41782 \begin_layout Chapter
41788 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41790 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
41795 \begin_inset Index idx
41798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41807 \begin_layout Standard
41808 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
41810 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41814 It has the following submenus.
41817 \begin_layout Section
41821 \begin_layout Subsection
41825 \begin_layout Subsubsection
41826 User Interface File
41827 \begin_inset Index idx
41830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41831 Customization ! of toolbars
41837 \begin_inset Index idx
41840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41841 Customization ! of menus
41849 \begin_layout Standard
41850 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
41851 interface (ui) file.
41852 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
41860 \begin_layout Description
41865 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
41868 \begin_layout Description
41875 the menu entries in popup context menus
41878 \begin_layout Description
41883 specifies the toolbar buttons
41886 \begin_layout Standard
41887 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
41888 and edit the entries.
41891 \begin_layout Standard
41892 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
41904 entries must be finished with an explicit
41929 and in the case of the
41930 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41934 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41942 The syntax for the entries is:
41945 \begin_layout Standard
41946 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
41952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41974 \begin_layout Standard
41976 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
41979 All the LyX-functions are listed in the menu
41981 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41994 \begin_inset space ~
42002 \begin_layout Standard
42003 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42009 \begin_layout Standard
42010 For example, assuming you use the menu
42012 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42015 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
42019 \begin_layout Standard
42020 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42044 \begin_layout Standard
42046 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42061 to have the sixth bookmark.
42064 \begin_layout Standard
42068 \begin_inset space ~
42073 allows you to change the appearance of LyX's toolbar buttons.
42074 The currently available icon sets are compared in
42075 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42078 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
42085 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42089 \begin_layout Standard
42092 Enable tool tips in main work area
42094 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
42098 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42102 \begin_layout Standard
42105 Restore window layouts and geometries
42107 LyX's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used
42108 in the last LyX session.
42111 \begin_layout Standard
42114 Restore cursor positions
42116 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
42120 \begin_layout Standard
42123 Load opened files from last session
42125 opens all files that were opened in the last LyX session.
42128 \begin_layout Standard
42131 Clear all session information
42133 deletes all information from previous LyX sessions (cursor positions, names
42134 of last opened documents, etc.).
42137 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42139 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42141 name "sub:Backup documents"
42146 \begin_inset Index idx
42149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42158 \begin_layout Standard
42161 Backup original documents when saving
42163 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
42164 it was saved the last time.
42165 It is stored in the
42168 \begin_inset space ~
42174 \begin_inset space ~
42178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42180 reference "sec:Paths"
42184 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
42187 \begin_inset space ~
42193 The backup file has the file extension
42194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42202 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42208 \begin_layout Standard
42211 Backup documents, every
42213 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
42216 \begin_layout Standard
42219 Save documents compressed by default
42221 always saves files in a compressed format.
42224 \begin_layout Standard
42229 is the number of last opened files that LyX should display in the menu
42232 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42234 \begin_inset space ~
42242 \begin_layout Standard
42245 Open documents in tabs
42247 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of LyX.
42250 \begin_layout Standard
42255 is only active if a LyXServer pipe
42259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42261 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42267 reference "sec:Paths"
42271 for information about LyXServer pipes.
42277 If it is checked, LyX documents will be opened in the same running instance
42279 Otherwise a new LyX instance is created for each file.
42282 \begin_layout Standard
42285 Single close-tab button
42287 is checked, there will only be one close button (
42290 \begin_inset Graphics
42291 filename ../images/closetab.png
42298 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
42299 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
42302 \begin_layout Standard
42303 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42311 For the last option you have to restart LyX before the change takes effect.
42319 \begin_layout Subsection
42321 \begin_inset Index idx
42324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42331 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42333 name "sub:Screen-Fonts"
42340 \begin_layout Standard
42341 These fonts are used to display your documents within LyX.
42344 \begin_layout Standard
42345 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42353 This section only deals with the fonts
42358 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
42361 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42362 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42373 \begin_layout Standard
42374 By default, LyX uses
42390 (depends on the system) as its
42393 \begin_inset space ~
42409 \begin_layout Standard
42410 You can change the font size with the
42417 \begin_layout Standard
42422 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
42424 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42427 points have the size of 1
42428 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42432 \begin_inset space ~
42436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42438 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
42443 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
42444 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42448 The sizes are explained in detail in section
42449 \begin_inset space ~
42453 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42455 reference "sub:Document-Font"
42462 \begin_layout Standard
42465 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
42467 enabled, LyX needs to redraw the screen less often.
42468 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
42469 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
42470 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
42472 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
42473 \begin_inset space ~
42479 \begin_layout Subsection
42481 \begin_inset Index idx
42484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42491 \begin_inset Index idx
42494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42503 \begin_layout Standard
42504 Here you can change the screen colors used by LyX by choosing an item in
42505 the list and selecting the
42512 \begin_layout Standard
42513 By checking the option
42517 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
42520 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
42521 \begin_inset space ~
42525 \begin_inset space ~
42530 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
42533 \begin_layout Subsection
42535 \begin_inset Index idx
42538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42547 \begin_layout Standard
42548 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside LyX.
42551 \begin_layout Standard
42556 enables previewing snippets of your document.
42557 This feature is described in section
42558 \begin_inset space ~
42562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42564 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
42571 \begin_layout Standard
42572 Checking the option
42575 \begin_inset space ~
42579 \begin_inset space ~
42583 \begin_inset space ~
42588 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
42591 \begin_layout Section
42593 \begin_inset Index idx
42596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42605 \begin_layout Subsection
42609 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42613 \begin_layout Standard
42616 Cursor follows scrollbar
42618 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
42622 \begin_layout Standard
42623 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
42624 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
42625 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
42628 \begin_layout Standard
42631 Scroll below end of document
42633 is self-explanatory.
42636 \begin_layout Standard
42637 In LyX one can jump from word to word by pressing
42644 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
42646 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
42647 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
42650 \begin_layout Standard
42653 Sort environments alphabetically
42655 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
42658 \begin_layout Standard
42661 Group environments by their category
42663 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
42666 \begin_layout Standard
42671 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
42682 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42686 \begin_layout Standard
42687 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
42692 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
42693 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
42697 \begin_layout Subsection
42699 \begin_inset Index idx
42702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42709 \begin_inset Index idx
42712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42713 Settings ! Shortcuts
42721 \begin_layout Standard
42726 specifies the file to be used to bind a LyX-function to a key.
42727 Several binding files are available, among them:
42730 \begin_layout Description
42731 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
42734 \begin_layout Description
42735 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
42747 \begin_layout Description
42748 mac.bind a set of bindings for
42751 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42759 \begin_layout Standard
42760 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
42765 , and binding files for special languages.
42766 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
42767 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42771 \begin_inset space \space{}
42775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42783 If you use LyX in a certain language, LyX will try to use the appropriate
42787 \begin_layout Standard
42788 Some binding files, like
42792 , only have a limited scope.
42793 When looking at the end of the file
42797 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
42800 \begin_layout Standard
42804 \begin_inset space ~
42808 \begin_inset space ~
42813 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
42814 in the selected key binding file.
42817 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42819 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42821 name "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
42826 \begin_inset Index idx
42829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42830 Key Bindings ! Editing
42838 \begin_layout Standard
42839 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
42840 the table in the dialog that lists all LyX-functions and the bound shortcuts.
42841 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
42844 Show key-bindings containing
42847 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
42848 Insert there for example as keyword
42849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42856 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
42857 functions that contain
42858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42866 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
42867 All LyX-functions are also listed in the file
42871 that you will find in the
42878 \begin_layout Standard
42879 For example, to add the shortcut
42887 , select the function and press the
42892 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
42893 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
42896 \begin_layout Standard
42897 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
42898 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the LyX
42899 Function definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the
42900 different function names as a semicolon separated list.
42901 LyX will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
42906 \begin_layout Standard
42907 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
42910 \begin_layout Standard
42911 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
42913 The syntax of the entries is:
42916 \begin_layout Standard
42922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42930 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42934 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42940 \begin_layout Subsection
42942 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42944 name "sub:Keyboard-Map"
42949 \begin_inset Index idx
42952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42959 \begin_inset Index idx
42962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42963 Settings ! Keyboard Map
42971 \begin_layout Standard
42972 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
42973 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, LyX provides keyboard maps.
42974 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
42975 is a Romanian one, you can enable
42978 \begin_inset space ~
42982 \begin_inset space ~
42987 and select the keyboard map file named
42994 \begin_layout Standard
43003 keyboard map and, if you use the
43007 bindings, you can select the first and second with
43010 arg "keymap-primary"
43016 arg "keymap-secondary"
43019 respectively or toggle between them with
43022 arg "keymap-toggle"
43028 \begin_layout Standard
43029 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43037 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
43046 \begin_layout Standard
43047 You can also specify the mouse
43049 Wheel scrolling speed
43052 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
43056 \begin_layout Standard
43064 \begin_inset space ~
43068 \begin_inset space ~
43073 you can select a key for zooming.
43074 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
43077 \begin_layout Subsection
43081 \begin_layout Standard
43082 Input completion is described in section
43083 \begin_inset space ~
43087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43089 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
43096 \begin_layout Section
43098 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43105 \begin_inset Index idx
43108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43115 \begin_inset Index idx
43118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43127 \begin_layout Standard
43128 The paths to the various resources used by LyX are normally determined during
43130 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
43133 \begin_layout Description
43135 \begin_inset space ~
43138 directory This is LyX's working directory.
43139 It is the default when you
43150 \begin_inset space ~
43158 \begin_layout Description
43160 \begin_inset space ~
43163 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
43165 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43167 \begin_inset space ~
43171 \begin_inset space ~
43179 \begin_layout Description
43181 \begin_inset space ~
43184 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
43190 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43194 \begin_inset Newline newline
43198 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43210 button does not exist when using LyX on Mac OS and Windows systems.
43218 \begin_layout Description
43220 \begin_inset space ~
43224 \begin_inset Index idx
43227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43233 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
43234 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
43235 \begin_inset space ~
43239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43241 reference "sub:Backup documents"
43249 will be used to save the backups.
43250 \begin_inset Newline newline
43253 Backup files have the ending
43254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43264 \begin_layout Description
43269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43277 \begin_inset space ~
43280 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
43281 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to LyX.
43282 \begin_inset Newline newline
43289 You add a BibTeX-database
43294 You can edit this file with the program
43303 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for LyX in its preferences under
43306 \begin_inset space ~
43312 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
43317 and click on the LyX-symbol.
43318 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
43324 and LyX need to be running the same time.
43325 \begin_inset Newline newline
43328 The pipe is also used for the
43333 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43337 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43339 reference "sub:Backup documents"
43344 \begin_inset Newline newline
43347 To use the LyXServer-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
43348 \begin_inset Newline newline
43364 \begin_layout Description
43366 \begin_inset space ~
43369 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
43372 \begin_layout Description
43374 \begin_inset space ~
43377 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
43378 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
43379 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
43382 \begin_layout Description
43384 \begin_inset space ~
43387 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
43393 You only need to specify it if you are using
43397 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
43403 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
43407 \begin_layout Description
43409 \begin_inset space ~
43412 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
43413 When LyX needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see
43414 where to find it on the system.
43415 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when LyX
43416 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
43418 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43422 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43425 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
43426 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
43429 \begin_layout Description
43431 \begin_inset space ~
43434 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
43435 which are included in a LyX document via commands in TeX code or in the
43437 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
43439 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
43440 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
43441 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
43442 scanned for the input files.
43443 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
43444 to be relative to the directory of your LyX file.
43445 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
43446 compilation may fail for some documents.
43449 \begin_layout Section
43453 \begin_layout Standard
43454 Here you can insert your
43463 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
43465 \begin_inset space ~
43469 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43471 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
43475 , to mark changes you make as yours.
43478 \begin_layout Section
43480 \begin_inset Index idx
43483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43484 Language ! Settings
43490 \begin_inset Index idx
43493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43494 Settings ! Language
43502 \begin_layout Subsection
43504 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43506 name "sub:Prefs-Language"
43513 \begin_layout Description
43515 \begin_inset space ~
43519 \begin_inset space ~
43522 language Here you can select the language for LyX's menus.
43523 You can find its actual translation status here:
43524 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43526 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
43533 \begin_layout Description
43535 \begin_inset space ~
43538 package determines which LaTeX package should be loaded to handle language
43540 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
43541 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
43542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43558 The most widespread language package is
43563 \begin_inset Index idx
43566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43567 LaTeX-packages ! babel
43572 ; it is the default language package in classic LaTeX.
43573 More recent typesetting engines such as XeTeX and LuaTeX come with the
43574 alternative language package
43579 \begin_inset Index idx
43582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43583 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
43588 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
43589 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
43595 The available selections are described in section
43596 \begin_inset space ~
43600 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43602 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
43609 \begin_layout Description
43611 \begin_inset space ~
43614 start If a special LaTeX-package is needed to write in a certain document
43615 language, you can here specify the command to start the package.
43616 An example is the start command
43622 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
43627 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
43642 selectlanguage{$$lang}
43647 \begin_layout Description
43649 \begin_inset space ~
43657 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
43658 command toggles the package on and off.
43661 \begin_layout Description
43663 \begin_inset space ~
43667 \begin_inset space ~
43670 Point Define the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
43674 \begin_layout Description
43676 \begin_inset space ~
43680 \begin_inset space ~
43683 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
43684 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
43685 used by all LaTeX-packages.
43686 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
43693 \begin_layout Description
43695 \begin_inset space ~
43698 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
43700 When this option is not set, the
43703 \begin_inset space ~
43708 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the LaTeX-output.
43709 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
43712 \begin_inset space ~
43720 \begin_layout Description
43722 \begin_inset space ~
43728 \begin_inset space ~
43734 When it is not set, the
43737 \begin_inset space ~
43742 is set to the end of the document.
43745 \begin_layout Description
43747 \begin_inset space ~
43751 \begin_inset space ~
43754 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
43755 language will be underlined in blue.
43758 \begin_layout Description
43760 \begin_inset space ~
43764 \begin_inset space ~
43767 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
43768 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
43771 \begin_layout Description
43773 \begin_inset space ~
43776 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
43777 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
43778 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
43779 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
43782 \begin_layout Subsection
43786 \begin_layout Standard
43787 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
43788 \begin_inset space ~
43792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43794 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
43801 \begin_layout Section
43805 \begin_layout Subsection
43809 \begin_layout Description
43811 \begin_inset space ~
43815 \begin_inset space ~
43818 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
43821 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43822 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43824 \begin_inset space ~
43830 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
43833 \begin_layout Description
43835 \begin_inset space ~
43839 \begin_inset Index idx
43842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43849 \begin_inset Index idx
43852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43853 Settings ! Date format
43858 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
43859 \begin_inset Newline newline
43863 \begin_inset Flex URL
43866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43868 http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date
43874 \begin_inset Newline newline
43877 For example the format
43878 \begin_inset Newline newline
43882 \begin_inset Newline newline
43885 prints the date as day/month/year.
43888 \begin_layout Description
43890 \begin_inset space ~
43894 \begin_inset space ~
43897 export Setting what LyX is allowed to overwrite on export.
43900 \begin_layout Description
43902 \begin_inset space ~
43905 search Commands that will be used for the menu
43907 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43909 \begin_inset space ~
43915 For a detailed description see section
43917 Reverse DVI/PDF search
43922 \begin_inset space ~
43930 \begin_layout Subsection
43932 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43939 \begin_inset Index idx
43942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43949 \begin_inset Index idx
43952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43961 \begin_layout Description
43963 \begin_inset space ~
43966 printer Here you can specify the name of your
43971 The name will be used when the
43976 \begin_inset Newline newline
43980 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43988 You can leave this field empty on Windows systems because it has no effect.
43996 \begin_layout Description
43998 \begin_inset space ~
44001 command is the command LyX
44002 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44006 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44009 LaTeX uses for printing.
44017 \begin_layout Description
44019 \begin_inset space ~
44023 \begin_inset space ~
44026 Options Here you can specify printer options.
44027 A list of printer options with explanations can be found in the documentation
44028 of the program that provides the
44035 \begin_layout Description
44037 \begin_inset space ~
44041 \begin_inset space ~
44045 \begin_inset space ~
44048 printer This option works only for the
44053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44061 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44065 It activates a configuration file for dvips.
44066 This is an option only for dvips experts.
44069 \begin_layout Subsection
44074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44082 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44084 name "sub:LaTeX-settings"
44089 \begin_inset Index idx
44092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44101 \begin_layout Description
44103 \begin_inset space ~
44110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44118 \begin_inset space ~
44122 \begin_inset space ~
44125 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
44130 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
44151 are used for Cyrillic.
44152 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
44153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44161 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44165 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
44166 LyX sets up in the background.
44167 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
44170 \begin_layout Description
44172 \begin_inset space ~
44176 \begin_inset space ~
44179 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
44184 value depends on your LaTeX-system setup.
44187 \begin_layout Description
44189 \begin_inset space ~
44193 \begin_inset space ~
44197 \begin_inset space ~
44201 \begin_inset space ~
44204 options They only have an effect when the program
44208 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
44211 \begin_layout Standard
44212 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
44213 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
44214 manuals of the applications.
44217 \begin_layout Description
44219 \begin_inset space ~
44222 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
44223 \begin_inset space ~
44227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44229 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
44236 \begin_layout Description
44238 \begin_inset space ~
44241 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
44242 \begin_inset space ~
44246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44248 reference "sub:Index-Program"
44255 \begin_layout Description
44257 \begin_inset space ~
44260 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
44261 \begin_inset space ~
44265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44267 reference "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
44274 \begin_layout Description
44279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44287 \begin_inset space ~
44290 command Command for the program
44294 that is described in the section
44300 Additional Features
44305 \begin_layout Standard
44306 There are additionally the following options:
44309 \begin_layout Description
44311 \begin_inset space ~
44315 \begin_inset space ~
44319 \begin_inset space ~
44323 \begin_inset space ~
44327 \begin_inset space ~
44330 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
44331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44348 to separate folders.
44349 This option is enabled by default when you use LyX on Windows.
44350 \begin_inset Index idx
44353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44360 \begin_inset Index idx
44363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44372 \begin_layout Description
44374 \begin_inset space ~
44378 \begin_inset space ~
44382 \begin_inset space ~
44386 \begin_inset space ~
44390 \begin_inset space ~
44394 \begin_inset space ~
44397 changes Removes all manually set
44403 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44404 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44406 \begin_inset space ~
44411 dialog when changing the document class.
44414 \begin_layout Section
44416 \begin_inset space ~
44420 \begin_inset Index idx
44423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44432 \begin_layout Subsection
44434 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44436 name "sub:Converters"
44441 \begin_inset Index idx
44444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44453 \begin_layout Standard
44454 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
44455 from one format to another.
44456 You can modify converters or create new ones.
44457 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
44464 \begin_inset space ~
44469 field and press the
44474 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
44478 \begin_inset space ~
44483 drop-down list, modify the
44487 field and press the
44494 \begin_layout Standard
44497 Converter File Cache
44503 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
44505 Maximum Age (in days
44508 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
44509 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
44512 \begin_layout Standard
44513 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
44514 definition, is described in the section
44525 \begin_layout Subsection
44527 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44529 name "sec:File-Formats"
44534 \begin_inset Index idx
44537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44544 \begin_inset Index idx
44547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44556 \begin_layout Standard
44557 Here you find the list of defined file formats that LyX can handle.
44566 programs that should be used for certain formats.
44569 \begin_layout Standard
44570 You can also define the
44572 Default output format
44574 that is used when you use
44576 View, Update, View Master Document
44580 Update Master Document
44586 menu or the toolbar.
44589 \begin_layout Standard
44590 More about formats and their options is described in the section
44601 \begin_layout Standard
44602 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in LyX's temporary
44603 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
44604 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
44605 This is done by specifying a
44610 More about this is described in the section
44621 \begin_layout Chapter
44622 Units available in LyX
44623 \begin_inset Index idx
44626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44633 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44635 name "chap:Units-available-in"
44642 \begin_layout Standard
44644 \begin_inset space ~
44648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44650 reference "tab:Units"
44654 explains all the units available in LyX and used in this documentation.
44657 \begin_layout Standard
44658 \begin_inset Float table
44664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44665 \begin_inset Caption Standard
44667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44668 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44683 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
44689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44691 \begin_inset Tabular
44692 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="2">
44693 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
44694 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
44695 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
44697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44791 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44795 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44819 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44823 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44846 scaled point (65536
44847 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44851 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44875 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44879 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44903 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44907 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
44911 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44935 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44939 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44962 % of original image width
44969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45151 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45155 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45176 \begin_layout Chapter
45178 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45180 name "chap:Credits"
45187 \begin_layout Standard
45188 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
45189 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
45192 \begin_layout Itemize
45195 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
45198 \begin_layout Itemize
45204 \begin_layout Itemize
45210 \begin_layout Itemize
45216 \begin_layout Itemize
45222 \begin_layout Itemize
45228 \begin_layout Itemize
45234 \begin_layout Itemize
45240 \begin_layout Itemize
45243 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
45246 \begin_layout Itemize
45252 \begin_layout Itemize
45258 \begin_layout Itemize
45264 \begin_layout Itemize
45270 \begin_layout Itemize
45276 \begin_layout Itemize
45282 \begin_layout Itemize
45288 \begin_layout Itemize
45294 \begin_layout Itemize
45296 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
45305 \begin_layout Standard
45306 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
45309 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
45316 \begin_layout Bibliography
45317 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45318 LatexCommand bibitem
45325 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45328 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
45333 \begin_inset Newline newline
45337 \begin_inset Flex URL
45340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45342 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
45350 \begin_layout Bibliography
45351 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45352 LatexCommand bibitem
45353 key "latexcompanion"
45357 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
45359 The LaTeX Companion Second Edition.
45362 Addison-Wesley, 2004
45365 \begin_layout Bibliography
45366 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45367 LatexCommand bibitem
45372 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
45375 A Guide to LaTeX Fourth Edition.
45378 Addison-Wesley, 2003
45381 \begin_layout Bibliography
45382 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45383 LatexCommand bibitem
45390 LaTeX: A Document Preparation System.
45393 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
45396 \begin_layout Bibliography
45397 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45398 LatexCommand bibitem
45410 Addison-Wesley, 1984
45413 \begin_layout Bibliography
45414 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45415 LatexCommand bibitem
45421 \begin_inset Newline newline
45425 \begin_inset Flex URL
45428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45430 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
45438 \begin_layout Bibliography
45439 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45440 LatexCommand bibitem
45446 \begin_inset Newline newline
45450 \begin_inset Flex URL
45453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45455 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
45463 \begin_layout Bibliography
45464 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45465 LatexCommand bibitem
45471 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45473 name "Documentation"
45474 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
45483 \begin_inset Newline newline
45487 \begin_inset Flex URL
45490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45492 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
45500 \begin_layout Bibliography
45501 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45502 LatexCommand bibitem
45508 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45510 name "Documentation"
45511 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
45515 how to use the program
45520 \begin_inset Newline newline
45524 \begin_inset Flex URL
45527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45529 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
45537 \begin_layout Bibliography
45538 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45539 LatexCommand bibitem
45545 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45547 name "Documentation"
45548 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
45557 \begin_inset Newline newline
45561 \begin_inset Flex URL
45564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45566 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
45574 \begin_layout Bibliography
45575 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45576 LatexCommand bibitem
45582 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45584 name "Documentation"
45585 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
45594 \begin_inset Newline newline
45598 \begin_inset Flex URL
45601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45603 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
45611 \begin_layout Bibliography
45612 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45613 LatexCommand bibitem
45619 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45621 name "Documentation"
45622 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
45626 of the AMS LaTeX-packages:
45627 \begin_inset Newline newline
45631 \begin_inset Flex URL
45634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45636 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
45644 \begin_layout Bibliography
45645 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45646 LatexCommand bibitem
45652 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45654 name "Documentation"
45655 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
45659 of the LaTeX-package
45664 \begin_inset Index idx
45667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45668 LaTeX-packages ! caption
45674 \begin_inset Newline newline
45678 \begin_inset Flex URL
45681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45683 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
45691 \begin_layout Bibliography
45692 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45693 LatexCommand bibitem
45699 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45701 name "Documentation"
45702 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
45706 of the LaTeX-package
45711 \begin_inset Index idx
45714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45715 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
45721 \begin_inset Newline newline
45725 \begin_inset Flex URL
45728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45730 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
45738 \begin_layout Bibliography
45739 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45740 LatexCommand bibitem
45746 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45748 name "Documentation"
45749 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
45753 of the LaTeX-package
45758 \begin_inset Index idx
45761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45762 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
45768 \begin_inset Newline newline
45772 \begin_inset Flex URL
45775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45777 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
45785 \begin_layout Bibliography
45786 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45787 LatexCommand bibitem
45793 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45795 name "Documentation"
45796 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
45800 of the LaTeX-package
45805 \begin_inset Index idx
45808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45809 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
45815 \begin_inset Newline newline
45819 \begin_inset Flex URL
45822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45824 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
45832 \begin_layout Bibliography
45833 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45834 LatexCommand bibitem
45840 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45842 name "Documentation"
45843 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
45847 of the LaTeX-package
45852 \begin_inset Index idx
45855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45856 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
45862 \begin_inset Newline newline
45866 \begin_inset Flex URL
45869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45871 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
45879 \begin_layout Bibliography
45880 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45881 LatexCommand bibitem
45887 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45889 name "Documentation"
45890 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
45894 of the LaTeX-package
45899 \begin_inset Index idx
45902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45903 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
45909 \begin_inset Newline newline
45913 \begin_inset Flex URL
45916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45918 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
45926 \begin_layout Bibliography
45927 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45928 LatexCommand bibitem
45934 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45936 name "Documentation"
45937 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
45941 of the LaTeX-package
45946 \begin_inset Index idx
45949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45950 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
45956 \begin_inset Newline newline
45960 \begin_inset Flex URL
45963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45965 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
45973 \begin_layout Bibliography
45974 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45975 LatexCommand bibitem
45981 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45984 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
45988 how to set up LyX for Arabic:
45989 \begin_inset Newline newline
45993 \begin_inset Flex URL
45996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45998 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
46006 \begin_layout Bibliography
46007 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46008 LatexCommand bibitem
46014 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46017 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
46021 how to set up LyX for Armenian:
46022 \begin_inset Newline newline
46026 \begin_inset Flex URL
46029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46031 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
46039 \begin_layout Bibliography
46040 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46041 LatexCommand bibitem
46047 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46050 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
46054 how to set up LyX for Cyrillic languages:
46055 \begin_inset Newline newline
46059 \begin_inset Flex URL
46062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46064 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
46072 \begin_layout Bibliography
46073 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46074 LatexCommand bibitem
46080 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46083 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
46087 how to set up LyX for Farsi:
46088 \begin_inset Newline newline
46092 \begin_inset Flex URL
46095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46097 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
46105 \begin_layout Bibliography
46106 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46107 LatexCommand bibitem
46113 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46116 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
46120 how to set up LyX for Hebrew:
46121 \begin_inset Newline newline
46125 \begin_inset Flex URL
46128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46130 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
46138 \begin_layout Bibliography
46139 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46140 LatexCommand bibitem
46146 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46149 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
46153 how to set up LyX for Japanese:
46154 \begin_inset Newline newline
46158 \begin_inset Flex URL
46161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46163 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
46171 \begin_layout Bibliography
46172 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46173 LatexCommand bibitem
46179 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46182 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
46186 how to set up LyX for Latvian:
46187 \begin_inset Newline newline
46191 \begin_inset Flex URL
46194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46196 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
46204 \begin_layout Bibliography
46205 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46206 LatexCommand bibitem
46212 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46215 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
46219 how to set up LyX for Lithuanian:
46220 \begin_inset Newline newline
46224 \begin_inset Flex URL
46227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46229 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
46237 \begin_layout Bibliography
46238 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46239 LatexCommand bibitem
46245 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46248 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
46252 how to set up LyX for Mongolian:
46253 \begin_inset Newline newline
46257 \begin_inset Flex URL
46260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46262 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
46270 \begin_layout Bibliography
46271 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46272 LatexCommand bibitem
46278 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46281 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
46285 how to set up LyX for Vietnamese:
46286 \begin_inset Newline newline
46290 \begin_inset Flex URL
46293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46295 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
46303 \begin_layout Bibliography
46304 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46305 LatexCommand bibitem
46311 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46314 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
46318 about new features in
46323 \begin_inset Newline newline
46327 \begin_inset Flex URL
46330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46332 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
46340 \begin_layout Standard
46341 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46375 \begin_inset Note Note
46378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46385 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
46386 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
46387 bibliography is the second one:
46395 \begin_layout Standard
46396 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
46397 LatexCommand bibtex
46398 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
46399 options "biblio/alphadin"
46406 \begin_layout Standard
46407 The above bibliography is created from a BibTeX-database.
46410 \begin_layout Standard
46411 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
46412 LatexCommand printnomenclature
46418 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
46419 LatexCommand printindex